Motorola Netopia 7000 Specifications

Administrator’s Handbook
Motorola Netopia® Embedded Software Version 7.7.4
Qwest
Copyright
Copyright © 2007 by Motorola, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work
(such as translation, transformation or adaptation) without written permission from Motorola, Inc.
Motorola reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part
of Motorola to provide notification of such revision or change. Motorola provides this guide without warranty of any kind, either implied
or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Motorola may
make improvements or changes in the product(s) described in this manual at any time. MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Me, and Windows NT are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S and/or other countries. Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc. Firefox is a
registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners.
Motorola, Inc.
6001 Shellmound Street
Emeryville, CA 94608
U.S.A.
Motorola, Inc. Part Number: 6161250-00-01
2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Copyright
Introduction
..........................................2
.................................. 7
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About Motorola Netopia® Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
A Word About Example Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CHAPTER 1
Overview of Major Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Wide Area Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Simplified Local Area Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CHAPTER 2
Basic Mode Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Set up the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Configure the Motorola Netopia® Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Motorola Netopia® Gateway Status Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . 34
Accessing the Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Links Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
58
65
66
71
72
3
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 3
Advanced Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Access the Expert Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Links Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
IP Passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
NAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
IPSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Router Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Time Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Remote Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Update Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Reset Router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Restart Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
CHAPTER 4
Basic Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Status Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Factory Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
CHAPTER 5
Command Line Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Starting and Ending a CLI Session
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Using the CLI Help Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
About SHELL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
SHELL Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
About CONFIG Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
CONFIG Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
4
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 7
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Technical Specifications and Safety Information
. . . . . . . 333
Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Agency approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
47 CFR Part 68 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Electrical Safety Advisory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Copyright Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5
Table of Contents
6
Intended Audience
Introduction
Intended Audience
This guide is targeted primarily to residential service subscribers.
Advanced sections may also be of use to the support staffs of broadband service providers and advanced residential service subscribers. See “Advanced Setup” on page 73.
About Motorola Netopia® Documentation
Motorola, Inc. provides a suite of technical information for its 2200 and 3300-series family
of intelligent enterprise and consumer Gateways. It consists of:
• Administrator’s Handbook
• Dedicated Quickstart guides
• Specific White Papers
The documents are available in electronic form as Portable Document Format (PDF) files.
They are viewed (and printed) from Adobe Acrobat Reader, Exchange, or any other application that supports PDF files.
They are downloadable from Netopia’s website: http://www.netopia.com/
☛
NOTE:
This guide describes the wide variety of features and functionality of the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway, when used in Router mode. The Motorola Netopia® Gateway may also be delivered in Bridge mode. In Bridge mode, the
Gateway acts as a pass-through device and allows the workstations on your
LAN to have public addresses directly on the Internet.
Introduction
7
Introduction
Organization
This guide consists of seven chapters, including a glossary, and an index. It is organized
as follows:
• “Introduction” — Describes the Motorola Netopia® document suite, the purpose of,
the audience for, and structure of this guide. It gives a table of conventions.
• Chapter 1, “Overview of Major Capabilities” — Presents a product description sum•
•
•
•
•
•
•
mary.
Chapter 2, “Basic Mode Setup” — Describes how to get up and running with your
Motorola Netopia® Gateway, and the Basic Mode Web-based user interface.
Chapter 3, “Advanced Setup” — Focuses on the Advanced Setup Web-based user
interface for advanced users. It is organized in the same way as the Web UI is organized. As you go through each section, functions and procedures are discussed in
detail.
Chapter 4, “Basic Troubleshooting” — Gives some simple suggestions for troubleshooting problems with your Gateway’s initial configuration.
Chapter 5, “Command Line Interface” — Describes all the current text-based commands for both the SHELL and CONFIG modes. A summary table and individual command examples for each mode is provided.
Chapter 6, “Glossary”
Chapter 7, “Technical Specifications and Safety Information”
Index
A Word About Example Screens
This manual contains many example screen illustrations. Since Motorola Netopia® 2200
and 3300 Series Gateways offer a wide variety of features and functionality, the example
screens shown may not appear exactly the same for your particular Gateway or setup as
they appear in this manual. The example screens are for illustrative and explanatory purposes, and should not be construed to represent your own unique environment.
8
Introduction
Documentation Conventions
Documentation Conventions
General
This manual uses the following conventions to present information:
Convention (Typeface)
Description
bold italic
monospaced
Menu commands
bold italic sans serif
Web GUI page links and button names
terminal
bold terminal
Computer display text
Italic
Italic type indicates the complete titles
of manuals.
User-entered text
Internal Web Interface
Convention (Graphics)
Description
light blue rectangle or line
Denotes an “excerpt” from a Web page
or the visual truncation of a Web page
solid rounded rectangle
with an arrow
Denotes an area of emphasis on a Web
page
Command Line Interface
Syntax conventions for the Netopia Gateway command line interface are as follows:
Convention
straight ([ ]) brackets in cmd
line
Introduction
Description
Optional command arguments
9
Introduction
curly ({ }) brackets, with values Alternative values for an argument are
separated with vertical bars (|). presented in curly ({ }) brackets, with
values separated with vertical bars (|).
bold terminal type User-entered text
face
italic terminal
type face
10
Introduction
Variables for which you supply your own
values
CHAPTER 1
Overview of Major
Capabilities
The Motorola Netopia® Gateway offers simplified setup and management features as well
as advanced broadband Gateway capabilities. The following are some of the main features
of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway:
• “Wide Area Network Termination” on page 12
The Gateway combines an ADSL modem with an Internet Gateway. It translates protocols used on the Internet to protocols used by home personal computers and eliminates the need for special desktop software (i.e. PPPoE).
• “Simplified Local Area Network Setup” on page 14
Built-in DHCP and DNS proxy features minimize or eliminate the need to program any
network configuration into your home personal computer. UPnP™ feature allows ease of
connection with many compatible networked devices.
• “Management” on page 16
A Web server built into the Motorola Netopia® Operating System makes setup and
maintenance easy using standard browsers. Diagnostic tools facilitate troubleshooting.
• “Security” on page 18
Network Address Translation (NAT), password protection, Stateful Inspection firewall
and other built-in security features prevent unauthorized remote access to your network.
NAT Games and other services, default server, and other features permit access to
computers on your home network that you can specify. VPN technology (standard VPN
Passthrough and optional IPSec tunnelling) enables telecommuters, mobile workforce
and branch offices to safely and affordably connect to a remote business network, for
effective communication and collaboration.
11
Wide Area Network Termination
PPPoE/PPPoA (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet/ATM)
The PPPoE specification, incorporating the PPP and Ethernet standards, allows your computer(s) to connect to your Service Provider’s network through your Ethernet WAN connection. The 2200 and 3300-series Gateway supports PPPoE, eliminating the need to install
PPPoE client software on any LAN computers.
Service Providers may require the use of PPP authentication protocols such as Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) or Password Authentication Protocol (PAP).
CHAP and PAP use a username and password pair to authenticate users with a PPP server.
A CHAP authentication process works as follows:
1.
2.
3.
The password is used to scramble a challenge string.
The password is a shared secret, known by both peers.
The unit sends the scrambled challenge back to the peer.
PAP, a less robust method of authentication, sends a username and password to a PPP
server to be authenticated. PAP’s username and password pair are not encrypted, and are
therefore sent “unscrambled”.
Instant-On PPP
You can configure your Gateway for one of two types of Internet connections:
• Always On
• Instant On
These selections provide either an uninterrupted Internet connection or an as-needed connection.
While an Always On connection is convenient, it does leave your network permanently connected to the Internet, and therefore potentially vulnerable to attacks.
Motorola Netopia®'s Instant On technology furnishes almost all the benefits of an AlwaysOn connection while providing two additional security benefits:
• Your network cannot be attacked when it is not connected.
12
Wide Area Network Termination
• Your network may change address with each connection making it more difficult to
attack.
When you configure Instant On access, you can also configure an idle time-out value. Your
Gateway monitors traffic over the Internet link and when there has been no traffic for the
configured number of seconds, it disconnects the link.
When new traffic that is destined for the Internet arrives at the Gateway, the Gateway will
instantly re-establish the link.
Your service provider may be using a system that assigns the Internet address of your
Gateway out of a pool of many possible Internet addresses. The address assigned varies
with each connection attempt, which makes your network a moving target for any attacker.
13
Simplified Local Area Network Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server
DHCP Server functionality enables the Gateway to assign to your LAN computer(s) a “private” IP address and other parameters that allow network communication. The default
DHCP Server configuration of the Gateway supports up to 253 LAN IP addresses.
This feature simplifies network administration because the Gateway maintains a list of IP
address assignments. Additional computers can be added to your LAN without the hassle
of configuring an IP address.
DNS Proxy
Domain Name System (DNS) provides end users with the ability to look for devices or web
sites by typing their names, rather than IP addresses. For web surfers, this technology
allows you to enter the URL (Universal Resource Locator) as text to surf to a desired website.
The Motorola Netopia® DNS Proxy feature allows the LAN-side IP address of the Gateway
to be used for proxying DNS requests from hosts on the LAN to the DNS Servers configured in the gateway. This is accomplished by having the Gateway's LAN address handed
out as the “DNS Server” to the DHCP clients on the LAN.
☛
NOTE:
The Motorola Netopia® DNS Proxy only proxies UDP DNS queries, not TCP
DNS queries.
14
Simplified Local Area Network Setup
UPnP™
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP™) is a set of protocols that allows a PC to automatically discover other UPnP devices (anything from an internet gateway device to a light switch),
retrieve an XML description of the device and its services, control the device, and subscribe to real-time event notification. PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateway’s WAN IP
address, and automatically create NAT port maps. This means that applications that support UPnP, and are used with a UPnP-enabled Motorola Netopia® Gateway, will not need
application layer gateway support on the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to work through NAT.
By default, UPnP is enabled on the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
15
Management
Embedded Web Server
There is no specialized software to install on your PC to configure, manage, or maintain
your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Web pages embedded in the operating system provide
access to the following Gateway operations:
• Setup
• System and security logs
• Diagnostics functions
Once you have removed your Motorola Netopia® Gateway from its packing container and
powered the unit up, use any LAN attached PC or workstation running a common web
browser application to configure and monitor the Gateway.
Diagnostics
In addition to the Gateway’s visual LED indicator lights, you can run an extensive set of
diagnostic tools from your Web browser.
Two of the facilities are:
• Automated “Multi-Layer” Test
The Run Diagnostics link initiates a sequence of tests. They examine the entire
functionality of the Gateway, from the physical connections to the data traffic.
• Network Test Tools
Three test tools to determine network reachability are available:
Ping - tests the “reachability” of a particular network destination by sending an ICMP
echo request and waiting for a reply.
NSLookup - converts a domain name to its IP address and vice versa.
TraceRoute - displays the path to a destination by showing the number of hops and the
Gateway addresses of these hops.
The system log also provides diagnostic information.
16
Management
☛
NOTE:
Your Service Provider may request information that you acquire from these various diagnostic tools. Individual tests may be performed at the command line.
(See “Command Line Interface” on page 163.).
17
Security
Remote Access Control
You can determine whether or not an administrator or other authorized person has access
to configuring your Gateway. This access (either time-restricted or unlimited until the router
is rebooted) can be turned on or off in the Web interface. Additionally, permanent remote
access can be configured in the CLI.
Password Protection
Access to your Motorola Netopia® device can be controlled through two access control
accounts, Admin or User.
• The Admin, or administrative user, performs all configuration, management or maintenance operations on the Gateway.
• The User account provides monitor capability only.
A user may NOT change the configuration, perform upgrades or invoke maintenance
functions.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
The Motorola Netopia® Gateway Network Address Translation (NAT) security feature lets
you conceal the topology of a hard-wired Ethernet or wireless network connected to its LAN
interface from Gateways on networks connected to its WAN interface. In other words, the
end computer stations on your LAN are invisible from the Internet.
Only a single WAN IP address is required to provide this security support for your entire
LAN.
LAN sites that communicate through an Internet Service Provider typically enable NAT,
since they usually purchase only one IP address from the ISP.
• When NAT is ON, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway “proxies” for the end computer stations on your network by pretending to be the originating host for network communications from non-originating networks. The WAN interface address is the only IP address
exposed.
18
Security
The Motorola Netopia® Gateway tracks which local hosts are communicating with which
remote hosts. It routes packets received from remote networks to the correct computer
on the LAN (Ethernet) interface.
• When NAT is OFF, a Motorola Netopia® Gateway acts as a traditional TCP/IP router, all
LAN computers/devices are exposed to the Internet.
A diagram of a typical NAT-enabled LAN follows:
Motorola Netopia® Gateway
Internet
LAN
Ethernet
Interface
WAN
Ethernet
Interface
NAT
NAT-protected
LAN stations
Embedded Admin Services:
HTTP-Web Server and Telnet Server Port
☛
NOTE:
1. The default setting for NAT is ON.
2. Motorola uses Port Address Translation (PAT) to implement the NAT facility.
3. NAT Pinhole traffic (discussed below) is always initiated from the WAN side.
19
Motorola Netopia® Advanced Features for NAT
Using the NAT facility provides effective LAN security. However, there are user applications
that require methods to selectively by-pass this security function for certain types of Internet traffic.
Motorola Netopia® Gateways provide special gaming and other service configuration tools
that enable you to establish NAT-protected LAN layouts that still provide flexible by-pass
capabilities.
Some of these rules require coordination with the unit’s embedded administration services: the internal Web (HTTP) Port (TCP 80) and the internal Telnet Server Port (TCP 23).
Internal Servers
The internal servers are the embedded Web and Telnet servers of the Gateway. You would
change the internal server ports for Web and Telnet of the Gateway if you wanted to have
these services on the LAN using pinholes or the Default server. Pinhole configuration rules
provide an internal port forwarding facility that enables you to eliminate conflicts with
embedded administrative ports 80 and 23.
Default Server
This feature allows you to:
• Direct your Gateway to forward all externally initiated IP traffic (TCP and UDP protocols
only) to a default host on the LAN.
• Enable it for certain situations:
Where you cannot anticipate what port number or packet protocol an in-bound application might use.
For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers when a connection is
opened.
When you want all unsolicited traffic to go to a specific LAN host.
Combination NAT Bypass Configuration
Specific Games and services and Default Server settings, each directed to different LAN
devices, can be used together.
20
Security
☛
WARNING:
NAT Bypass configuration allows inbound access to the specified LAN station.
Contact your Network Administrator for LAN security questions.
IP-Passthrough
The Netopia Gateway now offers an IP passthrough feature. The IP passthrough feature
allows a single PC on the LAN to have the Gateway’s public address assigned to it. It also
provides PAT (NAPT) via the same public IP address for all other hosts on the private LAN
subnet.
VPN IPSec Pass Through
This Motorola Netopia® service supports your independent VPN client software in a transparent manner. Motorola has implemented an Application Layer Gateway (ALG) to support
multiple PCs running IP Security protocols.
This feature has three elements:
1.
2.
3.
On power up or reset, the address mapping function (NAT) of the Gateway’s WAN configuration is turned on by default.
When you use your third-party VPN application, the Gateway recognizes the traffic
from your client and your unit. It allows the packets to pass through the NAT “protection layer” via the encrypted IPSec tunnel.
The encrypted IPSec tunnel is established “through” the Gateway.
21
A typical VPN IPSec Tunnel pass through is diagrammed below:
Motorola Netopia®
Gateway
☛
NOTE:
Typically, no special configuration is necessary to use the IPSec pass through
feature.
In the diagram, VPN PC clients are shown behind the Motorola Netopia® Gateway and the secure server is at Corporate Headquarters across the WAN. You
cannot have your secure server behind the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
When multiple PCs are starting IPSec sessions, they must be started one at a
time to allow the associations to be created and mapped.
VPN IPSec Tunnel Termination
This Motorola Netopia® service supports termination of VPN IPsec tunnels at the Gateway.
This permits tunnelling from the Gateway without the use of third-party VPN client software
on your client PCs. Currently one IPSec VPN tunnel is supported on Motorola Netopia®
2200 and 3300 Series Gateways. Unlike VPN Passthrough, IPsec VPN tunnel is a keyed
feature that you can obtained from Motorola. See “Security Settings” on page 253.
22
Security
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS support allows you to use the free services of www.dyndns.org. Dynamic
DNS automatically directs any public Internet request for your computer's name to your current dynamically-assigned IP address. This allows you to get to the IP address assigned to
your Gateway, even though your actual IP address may change as a result of a PPPoE connection to the Internet. See “Dynamic DNS Settings” on page 210.
Stateful Inspection Firewall
Stateful inspection is a security feature that prevents unsolicited inbound access when
NAT is disabled. You can configure UDP and TCP “no-activity” periods that will also apply to
NAT time-outs if stateful inspection is enabled on the interface. Technical details are discussed in “Stateful Inspection” on page 262.
23
24
CHAPTER 2
Basic Mode Setup
Most users will find that the basic Quickstart configuration is all that they ever need to use.
This section may be all that you ever need to configure and use your Motorola Netopia®
Gateway. The following instructions cover installation in Router Mode.
This section covers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Important Safety Instructions” on page 26
“Set up the Motorola Netopia® Gateway” on page 27
“Configure the Motorola Netopia® Gateway” on page 31
“Motorola Netopia® Gateway Status Indicator Lights” on page 34
“Accessing the Web User Interface” on page 35
“Links Bar” on page 36
25
Important Safety Instructions
POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
Connect the power supply cord to the power jack on the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Plug
the power supply into an appropriate electrical outlet.
☛
CAUTION:
Depending on the power supply provided with the product, either the direct
plug-in power supply blades, power supply cord plug or the appliance coupler
serves as the mains power disconnect. It is important that the direct plug-in
power supply, socket-outlet or appliance coupler be located so it is readily
accessible.
CAUTION (North America Only): For use only with a CSA Certified or UL
Listed Limited Power Source or Class 2 power supply, rated 12Vdc.
(Sweden) Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag när den ansluts till ett
nätverk
(Norway) Apparatet må kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.
USB-powered models: For Use with Listed I.T.E. Only
TELECOMMUNICATION INSTALLATION
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed
to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen
sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There
may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
26
Set up the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
Set up the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
Refer to your Quickstart Guide for instructions on how to connect your Motorola Netopia®
Gateway to your power source, PC or local area network, and your Internet access point,
whether it is a dedicated DSL outlet or a DSL or cable modem. Different Motorola Netopia® Gateway models are supplied for any of these connections. Be sure to enable
Dynamic Addressing on your PC. Perform the following:
27
Microsoft Windows:
Step 1. Navigate to the TCP/IP Properties Control Panel.
a. Windows 98, ME. and 2000 versions follow a path like this:
Start menu -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Network (or Network and Dial-up Connections ->
Local Area Connection -> Properties) -> TCP/IP
[your_network_card] or Internet Protocol [TCP/
IP] -> Properties
b. Windows XP follows a path like this:
Start menu -> Control Panel -> Network and
Internet Connections -> Network Connections -> Local Area Connection -> Properties
-> Internet Protocol [TCP/IP] -> Properties
Then go to Step 2.
Step 2. Select Obtain an IP address automatically.
Step 3. Select Obtain DNS server address automatically, if available.
Step 4. Remove any previously configured Gateways, if available.
Step 5. OK the settings. Restart if prompted.
28
Set up the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
c. Windows Vista is set to obtain an IP address automatically by default. You may not need
to configure it at all.
To check, open the Networking Control Panel and select Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPv4). Click the Properties button.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window should appear as shown.
If not, select the radio buttons shown above, and click the OK button.
29
Macintosh MacOS 9 or higher or Mac OS X:
Step 1. Access the TCP/IP or Network control panel.
a. Mac OS 9 follows a path like this:
Apple Menu -> Control Panels -> TCP/IP
Control Panel
b. Mac OS X follows a path like this:
Apple Menu -> System Preferences -> Network
Then go to Step 2.
Step 2. Select Built-in Ethernet
Step 3. Select Configure Using DHCP
Step 4. Close and Save, if prompted.
Proceed to “Configure the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway” on page 31.
30
Configure the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
Configure the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
1.
Run your Web browser application, such as Firefox or Microsoft Internet Explorer,
from the computer connected to the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
Enter http://192.168.0.1 in the URL Address text box. Press Enter or click Go.
The Admin Password page appears.
For security, you must create and enter an Administrative password for accessing the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
• The administrative User name is admin.
• The initial Password can be whatever you choose, from one to 32 characters long.
This user name and password are separate from the user name and password you will
use to access the Internet. You may change them later. You will be challenged for this
Admin username and password any time that you attempt to access the Motorola Netopia® Gateway’s configuration pages.
31
When you connect to your Gateway as an Administrator, you enter “admin” as the UserName and the Password you just created.
The browser displays the Internet Login page.
2.
32
Enter the User Name and Password supplied by your Internet Service Provider.
Click the Connect button.
Configure the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
3.
Once you enter your User Name and Password here, you will no longer need to enter
them whenever you access the Internet. The Motorola Netopia® Gateway stores this
information and automatically connects you to the Internet.
Congratulations! Your installation is complete. You can now surf to your favorite Web
sites by typing an URL in your browser’s location box or by selecting one of your
favorite Internet bookmarks.
You can access the Gateway’s internal management pages at any time by entering
http://192.168.0.1 in your browser’s address field.
The Motorola Netopia® Gateway’s home page appears.
If you have any questions or encounter problems with your Motorola Netopia® Gateway,
refer to the detailed documentation on the Motorola Netopia® CD, or contact your service
provider’s technical support helpdesk.
Answers to many frequently asked Motorola Netopia® modem questions are also available
on-line at: http://www.netopia.com/support.
33
Motorola Netopia® Gateway Status Indicator
Lights
Colored LEDs on your Motorola Netopia® Gateway indicate the status of various port activity. Also, see “Basic Troubleshooting” on page 157 for more information.
Motorola Netopia® Gateway 3347-02 status indicator lights
Internet
DSL
Power Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Wireless
34
LED
Action
Power
Green when power is on. Red when updating embedded
software, or for system failure.
Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4
Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is
activity on the LAN. Red when bad userid and password
are entered.
Wireless
Flashes green when there is activity on the wireless
LAN.
DSL
Solid green when Internet connection is established.
Internet
Solid green when router is connected. Flashes green
when transmitting or receiving data.
Accessing the Web User Interface
Accessing the Web User Interface
After you have performed the basic Quickstart configuration, any time you log in to your
Motorola Netopia® Gateway you will access the Motorola Netopia® Gateway Home page.
You access the Home Page by typing http://192.168.0.1 in your Web browser’s location
box.
The Basic Mode Home Page appears.
The links in the left-hand column on this page allow you to manage or configure several features of your Gateway. Each link is described in its own section.
35
Links Bar
The Links Bar is the frame at the left-hand side of the page containing the major navigation links. These links are available
from almost every page, allowing you to move freely about the
site. The headings in the following table are hyperlinks. You can
click on any heading to read about that feature.
“Home” on page 37
“Wireless” on page 39
“Gaming” on page 58
“Advanced Setup” on page 65
“Status” on page 66
“Diagnostics” on page 71
“Help” on page 72
36
Home
Home
Home Page Information
The Home page displays information about the following categories:
• Connection Information
• Router Information
• Local Network
Click the Help link in the left-hand column of links to display a page of explanatory information. Help is available for every page in the Web interface.
37
Home Page Links
The links in the left-hand column of the Home page access a series of pages to allow you
to monitor, diagnose, and update your router. The following sections give descriptions of
these pages.
38
Home
Link: Wireless
(supported models only)
When you click Wireless, the 3-D Reach Wireless configuration page appears.
Enable Wireless
The wireless function is not automatically enabled by default. If you check the Enable
Wireless checkbox, the Wireless Options are enabled, and the Gateway will provide or
broadcast its wireless LAN services.
Wireless ID (SSID)
The Wireless ID is preset to a number unique to your unit. You can either leave it as is, or
change it by entering a freeform name of up to 32 characters, for example “Hercule’s Wireless LAN”. On client PCs’ software, this might also be called the Network Name. The Wireless ID is used to identify this particular wireless LAN. Depending on their operating
system or client wireless card, users must either:
• select from a list of available wireless LANs that appear in a scanned list on their client
39
• or enter this name on their clients in order to join this wireless LAN.
Privacy
The pull-down menu for enabling Privacy offers four settings: WPA-802.1x, WPA-PSK,
WEP-Manual, and Off - No Privacy.
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT YOU ENABLE SOME FORM OF PRIVACY
FOR THE SECURITY OF YOUR WIRELESS NETWORK.
See “Privacy” on page 44 for more information.
40
Home
Advanced Configuration Options (optional)
When you click the Advanced Configuration Options button, the Advanced 802.11
Wireless screen appears. This screen varies its options depending on which form of wireless Privacy you have selected.
Operating Mode
The pull-down menu allows you to select and lock the Gateway into the wireless transmission mode you want. For compatibility with clients using 802.11b (up to 11 Mbps transmission) and 802.11g (up to 20+ Mbps), select Normal (802.11b + g). To limit your wireless
LAN to one mode or the other, select 802.11b Only, or 802.11g Only.
☛
NOTE:
If you choose to limit the operating mode to 802.11b or 802.11g only, clients
using the mode you excluded will not be able to connect.
41
Default Channel
(1 through 11, for North America) on which the network will broadcast. This is a frequency
range within the 2.4Ghz band. Channel selection depends on government regulated radio
frequencies that vary from region to region. The widest range available is from 1 to 14.
Europe, France, Spain and Japan differ. Channel selection can have a significant impact on
performance, depending on other wireless activity close to this Router. Channel selection
is not necessary at the client computers; the clients will scan the available channels seeking access points using the same SSID as the client.
AutoChannel Setting
For 802.11G models, AutoChannel is a feature that allows the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
to determine the best channel to broadcast automatically.
Three settings are available from the pull-down menu: Off-Use default, At Startup, and
Continuous.
• Off-Use default: the Motorola Netopia® Gateway will use the configured default channel selected from the previous pull-down menu.
• At Startup – the default setting – causes the Motorola Netopia® Gateway at startup to
briefly initialize on the default channel, then perform a full two- to three-second scan,
and switch to the best channel it can find, remaining on that channel until the next
reboot.
• Continuous performs the at-startup scan, and will continuously monitor the current
channel for any other Access Point beacons. If an Access Point beacon is detected on
the same channel, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway will initiate a three- to four-minute
scan of the channels, locate a better one, and switch. Once it has switched, it will
remain on this channel for at least 30 minutes before switching again if another Access
Point is detected.
Enable Closed System Mode
If enabled, Closed System Mode hides the wireless network from the scanning features of
wireless client computers. Unless both the wireless clients and the Router share the same
Wireless ID in Closed System mode, the Router’s wireless LAN will not appear as an available network when scanned for by wireless-enabled computers. Members of the Closed
System WLAN must log onto the Router’s wireless network with the identical SSID as that
configured in the router.
42
Home
Closed System mode is an ideal way to increase wireless security and to prevent casual
detection by unwanted neighbors, office users, or malicious users such as hackers.
If you do not enable Closed System Mode, it is more convenient, but potentially less
secure, for clients to access your WLAN by scanning available access points. You must
decide based on your own network requirements.
About Closed System Mode and Wireless Encryption
Enabling Closed System Mode on your wireless Router provides another level of security,
since your wireless LAN will no longer appear as an available access point to client PCs
that are casually scanning for one.
Your own wireless network clients, however, must log into the wireless LAN by using the
exact SSID of the Motorola Netopia® Router.
In addition, if you have enabled WEP or WPA encryption on the Motorola Netopia® Router,
your network clients must also have WEP or WPA encryption enabled, and must have the
same WEP or WPA encryption key as the Motorola Netopia® Router.
Once the Motorola Netopia® Gateway is located by a client computer, by setting the client
to a matching SSID, the client can connect immediately if WEP or WPA is not enabled. If
WEP or WPA is enabled then the client must also have WEP or WPA enabled and a matching
WEP or WPA key.
Wireless client cards from different manufacturers and different operating systems accomplish connecting to a wireless LAN and enabling WEP or WPA in a variety of ways. Consult
the documentation for your particular wireless card and/or operating system.
Block Wireless Bridging
Check the checkbox to block wireless clients from communicating with other wireless clients on the LAN side of the Gateway.
43
Privacy
• OFF - No Privacy: This mode disables privacy on your network, allowing any wireless
users to connect to your wireless LAN. Use this option if you are using alternative security measures such as VPN tunnels, or if your network is for public use.
• WEP - Manual: WEP Security is a Privacy option that is based on encryption between
the Router and any PCs (“clients”) you have with wireless cards. If you are not using
WPA-PSK Privacy, you can use WEP Encryption instead. For this encryption to work, both
your Router and each client must share the same Wireless ID, and both must be using
the same encryption keys.
• WPA-802.1x provides RADIUS server authentication support. See RADIUS Server
authentication below.
• WPA-PSK provides Wireless Protected Access, the most secure option for your wireless network. See “WPA-PSK” on page 47. This mechanism provides the best data protection and access control.
Be sure that your Wi-Fi client adapter supports this option. Not all Wi-Fi clients support
WPA-PSK.
44
Home
RADIUS Server authentication
RADIUS servers allow external authentication of users by means of a remote authentication database. The remote authentication database is maintained by a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server. In conjunction with Wireless User Authentication,
you can use a RADIUS server database to authenticate users seeking access to the wireless services, as well as the authorized user list maintained locally within the Gateway.
If you select WPA-802.1x, the screen expands.
Click the Configure RADIUS Server button.
The Configure RADIUS Server screen appears.
45
Enter your RADIUS Server information in the appropriate fields:
• RADIUS Server Addr/Name: The default RADIUS server name or IP address that you
want to use.
• RADIUS Server Secret: The RADIUS secret key used by this server. The shared secret
should have the same characteristics as a normal password.
• Alt RADIUS Server Addr/Name: An alternate RADIUS server name or IP address, if
available.
• Alt RADIUS Server Secret: The RADIUS secret key used by this alternate server. The
shared secret should have the same characteristics as a normal password.
• RADIUS Server Port: The port on which the RADIUS server is listening, typically, the
default 1812.
Click the Save Changes button.
46
Home
WPA-PSK
One of the easiest ways to enable Privacy on your Wireless network is by selecting
WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access) from the pull-down menu.
The screen expands to allow you to enter a Pre Shared Key. The key can be between 8
and 63 characters, but for best security it should be at least 20 characters. When you have
entered your key, click the Save Changes button.
47
WEP-Manual
Alternatively, you can enable WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption by selecting
WEP-Manual from the Privacy pull-down menu.
You can provide a level of data security by enabling WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) for
encryption of network data. You can enable 40-, 128-, or 256-bit WEP Encryption (depending on the capability of your client wireless card) for IP traffic on your LAN.
48
Home
WEP - Manual allows you to enter your own encryption keys manually. This is a difficult
process, but only needs to be done once. Avoid the temptation to enter all the same characters.
Encryption Key Size #1 – #4: Selects the length of each encryption key. The longer the
key, the stronger the encryption and the more difficult it is to break the encryption.
Encryption Key #1 – #4: The encryption keys. You enter keys using hexadecimal digits.
For 40/64bit encryption, you need ten digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58 digits for 256bit
WEP. Hexadecimal characters are 0 – 9, and a – f.
Examples:
• 40bit: 02468ACE02
• 128bit: 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789
• 256bit: 592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F21A09C
Use WEP encryption key (1 – 4) #: Specifies which key the Gateway will use to encrypt
transmitted traffic. The default is key #1.
Click the click Save Changes button.
Any WEP-enabled client must have an identical key of the same length as the Router, in
order to successfully receive and decrypt the traffic. Similarly, the client also has a
‘default’ key that it uses to encrypt its transmissions. In order for the Router to receive the
client’s data, it must likewise have the identical key of the same length.
49
Enable Multiple Wireless IDs
This feature allows you to add additional network identifiers (SSIDs or Network Names) for
your wireless network. To enable Multiple Wireless IDs, click the button.
The Enable Multiple Wireless IDs screen appears to allow you to add up to three additional Wireless IDs.
When the Multiple Wireless SSIDs screen appears, check the Enable SSID checkbox for
each SSID you want to enable.
The screen expands to allow you to name each additional Wireless ID, and specify a Privacy mode for each one.
50
Home
Privacy modes available from the pull-down menu for the multiple SSIDs are: WPA-PSK,
WPA-802.1x, or Off-No Privacy.
These additional Wireless IDs are “Closed System Mode” Wireless IDs (see below) that
will not be shown by a client scan, and therefore must be manually configured at the client.
In addition, wireless bridging between clients is disabled for all members of these additional network IDs.
Click the Save Changes button. The Gateway will prompt you to restart it.
51
Click the Yes button, and the Gateway will restart with your new settings.
☛
NOTES:
The Gateway supports up to 4 different SSIDs:
• One SSID is broadcast by default and has wireless bridging enabled by
default.
• Three additional SSIDs are in “Closed System Mode” and have wireless
bridging disabled.
• These network IDs cannot be configured separately in terms of MAC
Address filtering.
• You can configure privacy on one SSID and disable it on another SSID.
52
Home
WiFi Multimedia
WiFi Multimedia is an advanced feature that allows you to prioritize various types of data
travelling over the wireless network. Certain types of data that are sensitive to delays,
such as voice or video, must be prioritized ahead of other, less delay-sensitive types, such
as email.
WiFi Multimedia currently implements wireless Quality of Service (QoS) by transmitting
data depending on Diffserv priority settings. These priorities are mapped into four Access
Categories (AC), in increasing order of priority:
•
•
•
•
Background (BK),
Best Effort (BE),
Video (VI), and
Voice (VO).
It requires WiFi Multimedia (WMM)-capable clients, usually a separate feature enabled at
the client network settings, and client PC software that makes use of Differentiated Services (Diffserv). Refer to your operating system instructions for enabling Diffserv QoS.
When you click the WiFi Multimedia button the WiFi Multimedia page appears.
To enable the WiFi Multimedia custom settings, select Diffserv from the pull-down menu.
53
The screen expands.
Router EDCA Parameters (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access) govern wireless data
from your Gateway to the client; Client EDCA Parameters govern wireless data from the
client to your Gateway.
☛
NOTE:
It is not recommended that you modify these settings without direct knowledge or instructions to do so. Modifying these settings inappropriately could
seriously degrade network performance.
• AIFs: (Arbitration Interframe Spacing) the wait time in milliseconds for data frames.
• cwMin: (Minimum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range for determining initial random backoff. The value you choose must be lower than cwMax.
54
Home
• cwMax: (Maximum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range of
determining final random backoff. The value you choose must be higher than cwMin.
• TXOP Limit: Time interval in microseconds that clients may initiate transmissions.
(When Operating Mode is B-only, default values are used and this field is not configurable.)
Click the Save Changes button.
Wireless MAC Authorization (optional)
MAC Authorization allows you to specify which client PCs are allowed to join the wireless
LAN by unique hardware (MAC) address. To enable this feature, click the Limit Wireless
Access by MAC Address button. The MAC Authorization screen appears.
Select Enabled from the pull-down menu.
55
The screen expands to permit you to add MAC addresses.
Click the Add button.
Once it is enabled, only entered MAC addresses that have been set to Allow will be
accepted onto the wireless LAN. All unlisted addresses will be blocked, in addition to the
listed addresses with Allow disabled.
56
Home
Click the Submit button.
When you are finished adding MAC addresses click the Save Changes button. You will
be returned to the 802.11 Wireless page. You can Add, Edit, or Delete any of your entries
later by returning to this page.
57
Link: Gaming
When you click Gaming, the NAT (Games and Other Services) page appears.
NAT (Games and Other Services) allows you to host internet applications when NAT is
enabled. You can host different games and software on different PCs. If you uncheck the
Enable NAT checkbox, the rest of the information on the page is hidden.
From the Service Name pull-down menu, you can select any of a large number of predefined games and software. (See “Supported Games and Software” on page 59.)
1.
Once you choose a software service or game, click Enable.
The Enable Service screen appears.
Select Host Device specifies the machine on which the selected software is hosted.
2.
58
Select a PC to host the software from the Select Host Device pull-down
menu and click Enable.
Home
Each time you enable a software service or game your entry will be added to the list of
Service Names displayed on the NAT Configuration page.
To remove a game or software from the hosted list, choose the game or software you want
to remove and click the Disable button.
Supported Games and Software
Age of Empires, v.1.0
Age of Empires: The Rise of
Rome, v.1.0
Age of Wonders
Asheron's Call
Baldur's Gate
Battlefield Communicator
Buddy Phone
Calista IP Phone
CART Precision Racing, v 1.0
Citrix Metaframe/ICA Client
Close Combat for Windows 1.0
Close Combat: A Bridge Too
Far, v 2.0
59
60
Close Combat III: The Russian
Front, v 1.0
Combat Flight Sim: WWII
Europe Series, v 1.0
Combat Flight Sim 2: WWII
Pacific Thr, v 1.0
Dark Reign
Delta Force (Client and Server)
Delta Force 2
Diablo II Server
Dialpad
DNS Server
Dune 2000
eDonkey 2000
eMule
F-16, Mig 29
F-22, Lightning 3
Fighter Ace II
FTP
GNUtella
H.323 compliant (Netmeeting,
CUSeeME)
Half Life
Hellbender for Windows, v 1.0
Heretic II
Hexen II
Hotline Server
HTTP
HTTPS
ICQ 2001b
ICQ Old
IMAP Client
IMAP Client v.3
Internet Phone
IPSec
IPSec IKE
Jedi Knight II: Jedi Outcast
Kali
KazaA
LimeWire
Links LS 2000
Mech Warrior 3
Mech Warrior 4: Vengeance
Medal of Honor Allied Assault
Microsoft Flight Simulator 98
Microsoft Flight Simulator
2000
Microsoft Golf 1998 Edition, v
1.0
Microsoft Golf 1999 Edition
Microsoft Golf 2001 Edition
Midtown Madness, v 1.0
Monster Truck Madness, v 1.0
Monster Truck Madness 2, v
2.0
Motocross Madness 2, v 2.0
Motocross Madness, v 1.0
MSN Game Zone
MSN Game Zone (DX7 an 8
Play)
Need for Speed 3, Hot Pursuit
Need for Speed, Porsche
Net2Phone
NNTP
Operation FlashPoint
Outlaws
pcAnywhere (incoming)
POP-3
PPTP
Quake II
Quake III
Rainbow Six
RealAudio
Return to Castle Wolfenstein
Home
Roger Wilco
Rogue Spear
ShoutCast Server
SMTP
SNMP
SSH server
StarCraft
Starfleet Command
StarLancer, v 1.0
Telnet
TFTP
Tiberian Sun: Command and
Conquer
Timbuktu
Total Annihilation
Ultima Online
Unreal Tournament Server
Urban Assault, v 1.0
VNC, Virtual Network Computing
Westwood Online, Command
and Conquer
Win2000 Terminal Server
XBox Live Games
Yahoo Messenger Chat
Yahoo Messenger Phone
ZNES
Define Custom Service
To configure a Custom Service, choose whether to use Port Forwarding or Trigger Ports.
• Port Forwarding forwards a range of WAN ports to an IP address on the LAN.
• Trigger Ports forwards a range of ports to an IP address on the LAN only after specific
outbound traffic “triggers” the feature.
Click the Next button.
If you chose Port Forwarding, the Port Range entry screen appears.
61
Port Forwarding forwards a range of WAN ports to an IP address on the LAN. Enter the following information:
• Service Name: A unique identifier for the Custom Service.
• Global Port Range: Range of ports on which incoming traffic will be received.
• Base Host Port: The port number at the start of the port range your Router should use
when forwarding traffic of the specified type(s) to the internal IP address.
• Protocol: Protocol type of Internet traffic, TCP or UDP.
Click the Next button.
If you chose Trigger Ports, the Trigger Ports entry screen appears.
62
Home
Trigger Ports forwards a range of ports to an IP address on the LAN only after specific outbound traffic “triggers” the feature. Enter the following information:
• Service Name: A unique identifier for the Custom Service.
• Global Port Range: Range of ports on which incoming traffic will be received.
• Local Trigger Port: Port number of the type of outbound traffic that needs to happen
(will be the trigger) to then allow the configured ports for inbound traffic.
Example: Set the trigger port to 21 and configure a range of 25 – 110. You would need
to do an outbound ftp before you were able to do an inbound smtp.
Click the Next button.
Static NAT
This feature allows you to:
• Direct your Router to forward all externally initiated IP traffic (TCP and UDP protocols
only) to a default host on the LAN.
• Enable it for certain situations:
– Where you cannot anticipate what port number or packet protocol an in-bound application might use. For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers
when a connection is opened.
– When you want all unsolicited traffic to go to a specific LAN host.
63
This feature allows you to direct unsolicited or non-specific traffic to a designated LAN station. With NAT “On” in the Router, these packets normally would be discarded.
For instance, this could be application traffic where you don’t know (in advance) the port or
protocol that will be used. Some game applications fit this profile.
From the pull-down menu, select the address of the PC that you want to be your default
NAT destination.
Click the Next button, and your choice will be so designated.
64
Home
Link: Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup allows you to configure a wide variety of specific Router and networking
settings. Advanced Setup is for advanced users and system administrators, and most
users will not need to modify these settings. If you need to enter Advanced Setup, and
click the Advanced Setup link, the Advanced Setup Home page displays.
For more information, see “Advanced Setup” on page 73.
65
Link: Status
When you click the Status link, the Links Bar expands to display nine statistical sub-headings.
These screens will vary depending on your Gateway’s model and traffic
activity.
•“DSL” on page 66
•“ATM” on page 67
•“Ethernet (supported models only)” on page 67
•“IP” on page 67
•“LAN” on page 68
•“USB (supported models only)” on page 68
•“Wireless (supported models only)” on page 69
•“Logs” on page 69
•“User List” on page 70
DSL
When you click DSL, the DSL Statistics page appears.
The DSL Statistics page displays information about the Router's WAN connection to the
Internet.
• Line State: May be Up (connected) or Down (disconnected).
• Modulation: Method of regulating the DSL signal. DMT (Discrete MultiTone) allows connections to work better when certain radio transmitters are present.
• Data Path: Type of path used by the device's processor.
Downstream and Upstream statistics
• Max Allowed Speed (kbps): Your maximum speeds for downloading (receiving) and
uploading (sending) data on the DSL line, in kilobits per second.
66
Home
• SN Margin (db): Signal to noise margin, in decibels. Reflects the amount of unwanted
“noise” on the DSL line.
• Line Attenuation: Amount of reduction in signal strength on the DSL line, in decibels.
• CRC Errors: Number of times data packets have had to be resent due to errors in
transmission or reception.
ATM
When you click ATM, the ATM Statistics page appears.
The ATM Statistics page displays detailed statistics about the upstream and downstream
data traffic handled by your Router. Displays the Virtual Circuit (VPI/VCI) settings as well as
information about your PPPoE session if operating in PPPoE mode. This information is useful for troubleshooting and when seeking technical support.
Ethernet (supported models only)
When you click Ethernet, the Ethernet Statistics page appears.
The Ethernet Statistics page:
• displays your Router's unique hardware (MAC) address.
• displays detailed statistics about your LAN data traffic, upstream and downstream.
IP
When you click IP, the IP Statistics page appears. The IP Statistics page displays the IP
interfaces and routing table information about your network.
General
• IP WAN Address: The public IP address of your Router, whether dynamically or statically assigned.
• IP Gateway: Your ISP's gateway router IP address
• Primary DNS: The IP address of the Primary Domain Name Server
• Primary DNS name: The name of the Primary Domain Name Server
• Secondary DNS: The IP address of the backup Domain Name Server (if any)
• Secondary DNS name: The name of the backup Domain Name Server (if any)
67
IP interfaces
• Address: Your Router's IP address as seen from your internal network (LAN), and from
the public Internet (WAN)
• Netmask: The subnet mask for the respective IP interfaces (LAN and WAN)
• Name: The name of each IP interface (example:Eth0, WAN1)
Network Routing Table and Host Routing Table
The Routing tables display all of the IP routes currently known to your Router.
LAN
When you click LAN, the LAN Statistics page appears.
The LAN Statistics page displays detailed information about your LAN IP configuration and
names and IP addresses of devices on your LAN.
• Router IP Address: The IP address of your Router as seen from the LAN
• DHCP Netmask: Subnet mask of your LAN
• DHCP Start Address: First IP address in the range being served to your LAN by the
Router's DHCP server
• DHCP End Address: Last IP address in the range being served to your LAN by the
Router's DHCP server
• DHCP Server Status: May be On or Off
• DNS Server: The IP address of the default DNS server
Devices on LAN
Displays the IP Address, MAC (hardware) Address, and network Name for each device on
your LAN connected to the Router.
USB (supported models only)
When you click USB, the USB Statistics page appears.
The USB Statistics page:
• displays your Router's unique hardware (MAC) address.
• displays detailed statistics about your LAN data traffic, upstream and downstream.
68
Home
Wireless (supported models only)
When you click Wireless, the Wireless Statistics page appears.
The Wireless Statistics page:
• displays your Router's unique hardware Wireless (MAC) address.
• displays detailed statistics about your Wireless LAN data traffic, upstream and downstream.
Logs
When you click Logs, the Logs page appears.
Select a log from the pull-down menu (the pull-down menu is available from every Log
page):
• All: Displays the entire system log.
• Connection: Displays events logged for the WAN connection.
• System: Displays events logged for the Router system configuration.
The CURRENT Router STATUS is displayed for all logs.
• To clear the individual logs, click the Clear Log button for that page.
• To clear all the logs, click the Clear All Logs button on the main Logs page.
• You can save logs to a text (.CTXT) file by clicking the Save to File button. This will
download the file to your browser’s default download location on your hard drive. The
file can be opened with your favorite text editor.
☛
Note:
69
Some browsers, such as Internet Explorer for Windows XP, require that you
specify the Motorola Netopia® Gateway’s URL as a “Trusted site” in “Internet
Options: Security”.
User List
When you click User List, the User List Statistics page appears.
The User List Statistics page:
• displays Ethernet Users’ PC Name, IP Address, and MAC Address.
• displays Wireless SSID Users’ PC Name, IP Address, and MAC Address.
If you have multiple SSIDs defined (see “Enable Multiple Wireless IDs” on page 50),
Wireless SSID users are displayed by their respective SSID.
70
Home
Link: Diagnostics
This automated multi-layer test examines the functionality of the Router from the physical
connections to the data traffic being sent by users through the Router.
You enter a web address, such as tftp.netopia.com, or an IP address in the Web Address
field and click the Test button. Results will be displayed in the Progress Window as they
are generated.
This sequence of tests takes approximately one minute to generate results. Please wait for
the test to run to completion.
Each test generates one of the following result codes:
Result
Meaning
* PASS:
The test was successful.
* FAIL:
The test was unsuccessful.
* SKIPPED:
The test was skipped because a test on which it depended failed.
* PENDING:
The test timed out without producing a result. Try running Diagnostics again.
* WARNING:
The test was unsuccessful. The Service Provider equipment your Router connects to may not support this test.
71
Link: Help
When you click the Help link in the left-hand column of links a page of explanatory information displays. Help (in English only) is available for every page in the Web interface.
Here is an example from the Home page:
72
Access the Expert Web Interface
CHAPTER 3
Advanced Setup
Using the Web-based user interface for the Motorola Netopia® 2200 and 3300-series
Gateway you can configure, troubleshoot, and monitor the status of your Gateway.
Access the Expert Web Interface
Open the Web Connection
Once your Gateway is powered up, you can use any recent version of the best-known web
browsers such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer from any LAN-attached
PC or workstation. The procedure is:
1.
2.
Enter the name or IP address of your Netopia Gateway in the Web browser's window
and press Return.
For example, you would enter http://192.168.0.1.
If an administrator or user password has been assigned to the Netopia Gateway,
enter Admin or User as the username and the appropriate password and click OK.
The Basic Mode Home Page opens.
73
3.
74
Click on the Advanced Setup link in the left-hand column of links.
The Home Page opens in Advanced Setup.
Access the Expert Web Interface
Home Page - Advanced Setup
The Advanced Setup Home Page is the summary page for your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. The links bar at the left provides links to controlling, configuring, and monitoring
pages. Critical configuration and operational status is displayed in the center section.
75
Home Page - Information
The Home Page contains a summary of the Gateway’s configuration settings and status.
Summary Information
Field
Status and/or Description
Connection Information
DSL/WAN Status
Connection
User Name
IP Address
IP Gateway
Primary and
Secondary DNS
Server
Speed
Line Attenuation
Restart Connection button
Connect button
Wide Area Network may be Waiting for DSL (or other waiting status), Up or Down
Up or Down
Your ISP-assigned Username
IP address assigned to the WAN port.
The IP address of the gateway to which the connection defaults. If doing DHCP, this
info will be acquired. If doing PPP, this info will be negotiated.
Address(es) of your ISP's Domain Name Server(s).
Your upstream and downstream data rates
amount of attenuation on your phone lines.
allows you to attempt to reconnect using the same login credentials as your current
connection.
allows you to reconnect using a different User Name and Password. This button is
only available if you are not connected.
Disconnect button allows you to disconnect your current connection. This button is only available if a
connection is established.
Router Information
Router Name and
Model
Serial Number
MAC Address
Software Version
Warranty Date
Your Router's manufacturing information
Your Router's unique serial number. Usually also printed on the Router's label.
Your Router's unique hardware address
The version of embedded operating system software currently running on the Gateway.
Original date when your Gateway is first connected and gets the time via the network,
for warranty purposes.
Local Network
IP Address
Ethernet
USB
76
The IP address of your Router as seen from your internal LAN
Status of your Ethernet network connection (if supported). Connected or Not Connected.
Status of your USB network connection (if supported). Connected or Not Connected.
Links Bar
Links Bar
The Links Bar is the frame at the left-hand side of the page
containing the major navigation links. These links are available
from every page, allowing you to move freely about the site.
The headings in the following table are hyperlinks. You can
click on any heading to read about that feature.
This chapter covers the following:
Advanced Setup
Configure
Status
Connection
Router Password
DSL
USB
DHCP Server
Time Zone
ATM
Wireless
IP Passthrough
VLAN
Ethernet
Logs
NAT
Wireless
IP
User List
IPSec
LAN
Diagnostics
Update Router
Reset Router
Restart Router
Basic Mode
Help
Note: Ethernet, Wireless, and USB links are only available on supported models.
77
Link: Configure
When you click Configure, the Links bar expands to display the configuration options available.
Advanced options are intended for experienced users and administrators. Exercise great caution when making any changes to
Advanced Configuration options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
78
“Connection” on page 79
“DHCP Server” on page 82
“IP Passthrough” on page 85
“NAT” on page 87
“IPSec” on page 94
“Router Password” on page 104
“Time Zone” on page 105
“VLAN” on page 106
“Wireless” on page 125
Links Bar
Link: Connection
When you click Connection, the Connection Configuration page appears.
Note: The appearance of this page will vary based on the model and WAN connection you
have.
Here you can set up or change the way you connect to your ISP. You should only change
these settings at your ISP's direction, or by agreement with your ISP.
79
• VPI/VCI: These values depend on the way your ISP's equipment is configured. The
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
80
default setting is 8/35. With this setting, the router will match the settings your ISP is
using, with no input on your part. You probably would not need to change this.
Protocol: The authentication and encapsulation protocol is determined by your ISP,
often by the type of account that you have signed up for. Options here are PPPOE LLC,
PPPOE VCMUX, ETHER LLC, IP LLC, PPPOA LLC, and PPPOA VCMUX.
Bridging: Your Router can be turned into a simple bridge, if desired. However, it will no
longer provide routing or security features in this mode.
Concurrent Bridging/Routing: Your Router can bridge or route traffic, depending on
the IP addresses, at the same time. When this mode is enabled, the Router will also
bridge traffic from the LAN if it has a valid LAN-side address.
PPPoE/PPPoA/DHCP Autosensing: The pull-down menu allows you to select an
autosensing feature, or to disable it. Selecting between PPPoE/DHCP or PPPoE/PPPoA
enables automatic sensing of your WAN connection type. If you select PPPoE/DHCP,
the gateway attempts to connect using PPPoE first. If the Gateway fails to connect after
60 seconds, it switches to DHCP. As soon as it can connect via DHCP, the Gateway
chooses and sets DHCP as its default. Otherwise, after attempting to connect via DHCP
for 60 seconds, the Gateway switches back to PPPoE. The Gateway will continue to
switch back and forth in this manner until it successfully connects. Similarly, selecting
PPPoE/PPPoA causes the Gateway to attempt to connect by trying these protocols in
parallel, and using the first one that is successful. If you choose to disable the feature,
select Off.
User Name and Password: Provided by your ISP.
Confirm Password: Repeat your Password entry for confirmation
Select the IP Type:
Dynamic IP - DHCP (Default) –
Single Static IP Address –
Block of Static IP Addresses (Unnumbered Mode) –
Static IP Address: Your service provider may tell you that the WAN IP Address for your
Router is static. If so, enter the IP Address from your service provider in this field.
IP Gateway: The IP Address of the default gateway, or peer address if using PPP. This
is normally set to 0.0.0.0 for PPP connections.
Primary DNS Server: The IP Address of the Primary Domain Name Server
Secondary DNS Server: The IP Address of the backup Domain Name Server
Connection Type: If using PPPoE, this is a choice to have either an uninterrupted connection or an as-needed connection. The type of service you have signed up for with
your ISP. Options are On-Demand, Always ON, and Manual.
Links Bar
Always On: This setting provides convenience, but it leaves your network permanently
connected to the Internet.
On-Demand: Furnishes almost all the benefits of an Always On connection, but has
additional security benefits:
Your network cannot be attacked when it is not connected.
Your network may change address with each connection, making it more difficult to
attack.
Manual: This setting disables automatic connection attempts. The user must bring the
connection up and down via the Connect/Disconnect buttons.
• User Inactivity Timeout: For On-Demand connections only, you can specify the time in
seconds before disconnection if there is no data passing to or from the Internet.
• UPnP: Universal Plug and Play (UPnP™) is a set of protocols that allows a PC to automatically discover other UPnP devices (anything from an internet gateway device to a
light switch), retrieve an XML description of the device and its services, control the
device, and subscribe to real-time event notification. By default, UPnP is enabled on the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
For Windows XP users, the automatic discovery feature places an icon representing the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway automatically in the “My Network Places” folder. Doubleclicking this icon opens the Gateway’s web UI.
PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateway’s WAN IP address, and automatically create
NAT port maps. This means that applications that support UPnP, and are used with a
UPnP-enabled Motorola Netopia® Gateway, will not need application layer gateway support on the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to work through NAT.
You can disable UPnP, if you are not using any UPnP devices or applications. Uncheck
the UPnP Enabled checkbox.
When all of your entries are made, click the Save and Restart Connection button.
81
Link: DHCP Server
When you click DHCP Server, the DHCP Server Configuration page appears.
This feature simplifies network administration because the Router maintains a list of IP
address assignments. Additional computers can be added to your LAN without the hassle
of configuring an IP address. This is the default mode for your Router.
The Server configuration determines the functionality of your DHCP Settings. This functionality enables the Router to assign your LAN computer(s) a “private” IP address and other
parameters that allow network communication.
• Router IP Address: Specifies the IP address of the Router itself.
82
Links Bar
• Subnet Mask: Specifies the subnet mask of the Router itself. Defaults to the common
•
•
•
•
Class C subnet.
DHCP Start Address: Specifies the first address in the DHCP address range. You can
reserve a sequence of up to 253 IP addresses (including up to 64 IP addresses for
wireless clients) within a subnet, beginning with the specified address, for dynamic
assignment.
DHCP End Address: Specifies the last address in the DHCP address range.
DHCP Lease: Specifies the default length for DHCP leases issued by the Router. Enter
lease time in dd:hh:mm:ss (days/hours/minutes/seconds) format.
DHCP Server Enable: Uncheck this setting if you already have a DHCP server on your
LAN. This enables the DHCP server in this Router.
Additional IP Subnets
The Additional IP Subnets screen allows you to configure up to seven secondary subnets
and their DHCP ranges, by entering IP address/subnet mask pairs:
☛
Note:
You need not use this screen if you have only a single Ethernet IP subnet.
This screen displays seven rows of editable columns. All seven row labels are always visible, regardless of the number of subnets configured.
• To add an IP subnet, select one of the rows, and click the Edit button.
83
Check the Enabled checkbox
and click the Submit button.
The screen expands to
allow you to enter subnet
information.
If DHCP Server (see
below) is not enabled, the
DHCP Start Address and
DHCP End Address fields
do not appear.
Enter the Router’s IP
address on the subnet in
the IP Address field and
the subnet mask for the
subnet in the Netmask
field.
Enter the DHCP Start Address and End Address of the subnet range in their respective fields.
Ranges cannot overlap and there may be only one range per subnet.
• Click the Submit button.
• When you are finished adding subnets, click the Save Changes button, and when
prompted, restart the Router.
To delete a configured subnet, set both the IP address and subnet mask values to 0.0.0.0,
either explicitly or by clearing each field and clicking the Submit button to commit the
change.
☛
NOTE:
All additional DHCP ranges use the global lease period value. See page 82.
If you make any changes, click the Save Changes button.
84
Links Bar
Link: IP Passthrough
When you click IP Passthrough, the IP Passthrough Configuration page appears.
The IP passthrough feature allows a single PC on the LAN to have the Router’s public
address assigned to it. It also provides PAT (NAPT) via the same public IP address for all
other hosts on the private LAN subnet. Using IP passthrough:
• The public WAN IP is used to provide IP address translation for private LAN computers.
• The public WAN IP is assigned and reused on a LAN computer.
• DHCP address serving can automatically serve the WAN IP address to a LAN computer.
When DHCP is used for addressing the designated passthrough PC, the acquired or
configured WAN address is passed to DHCP, which will dynamically configure a singleservable-address subnet, and reserve the address for the configured PC’s MAC
address. This dynamic subnet configuration is based on the local and remote WAN
85
address and subnet mask. If the WAN interface does not have a suitable subnet mask
that is usable, for example when using PPP or PPPoE, the DHCP subnet configuration
will default to a class C subnet mask.
1.
Select either User Configured PC or an IP address displayed in the selection window (these are the IP addresses currently being served to computers on your LAN.)
If you select “User Configured PC”, you must then configure a local PC to have the public WAN IP address.
2.
Click Enable.
You will be reminded to restart the Router.
3.
Click the Restart Router link and confirm the restart when prompted.
Once configured, the passthrough host's DHCP leases will be shortened to two minutes.
This allows for timely updates of the host's IP address, which will be a private IP address
before the WAN connection is established. After the WAN connection is established and
has an address, the passthrough host can renew its DHCP address binding to acquire the
WAN IP address.
A restriction
Since both the Router and the passthrough host will use the same IP address, new sessions that conflict with existing sessions will be rejected by the Router. For example, suppose you are a teleworker using an IPSec tunnel from the Router and from the passthrough
host. Both tunnels go to the same remote endpoint, such as the VPN access concentrator
at your employer’s office. In this case, the first one to start the IPSec traffic will be
allowed; the second one – since, from the WAN, it's indistinguishable – will fail.
86
Links Bar
Link: NAT
When you click NAT, the NAT (Games and Other Services) page appears.
NAT (Games and Other Services) allows you to host internet applications when NAT is
enabled. You can host different games and software on different PCs. If you uncheck the
Enable NAT checkbox, the rest of the information on the page is hidden.
From the Service Name pull-down menu, you can select any of a large number of predefined games and software. (See “Supported Games and Software” on page 89.)
1.
Once you choose a software service or game, click Enable.
The Enable Service screen appears.
Select Host Device specifies the machine on which the selected software is hosted.
87
2.
Select a PC to host the software from the Select Host Device pull-down
menu and click Enable.
Each time you enable a software service or game your entry will be added to the list of
Service Names displayed on the NAT Configuration page.
To remove a game or software from the hosted list, choose the game or software you want
to remove and click the Disable button.
88
Links Bar
Supported Games and Software
Age of Empires, v.1.0
Age of Empires: The Rise of
Rome, v.1.0
Age of Wonders
Asheron's Call
Baldur's Gate
Battlefield Communicator
Buddy Phone
Calista IP Phone
CART Precision Racing, v 1.0
Citrix Metaframe/ICA Client
Close Combat for Windows 1.0
Close Combat: A Bridge Too
Far, v 2.0
Close Combat III: The Russian
Front, v 1.0
Combat Flight Sim: WWII
Europe Series, v 1.0
Combat Flight Sim 2: WWII
Pacific Thr, v 1.0
Dark Reign
Delta Force (Client and Server)
Delta Force 2
Diablo II Server
Dialpad
DNS Server
Dune 2000
eDonkey 2000
eMule
F-16, Mig 29
F-22, Lightning 3
Fighter Ace II
FTP
GNUtella
H.323 compliant (Netmeeting,
CUSeeME)
Half Life
Hellbender for Windows, v 1.0
Heretic II
Hexen II
Hotline Server
HTTP
HTTPS
ICQ 2001b
ICQ Old
IMAP Client
IMAP Client v.3
Internet Phone
IPSec
IPSec IKE
Jedi Knight II: Jedi Outcast
Kali
KazaA
LimeWire
Links LS 2000
Mech Warrior 3
Mech Warrior 4: Vengeance
Medal of Honor Allied Assault
Microsoft Flight Simulator 98
Microsoft Flight Simulator
2000
Microsoft Golf 1998 Edition, v
1.0
Microsoft Golf 1999 Edition
Microsoft Golf 2001 Edition
Midtown Madness, v 1.0
Monster Truck Madness, v 1.0
Monster Truck Madness 2, v
2.0
89
90
Motocross Madness 2, v 2.0
Motocross Madness, v 1.0
MSN Game Zone
MSN Game Zone (DX7 an 8
Play)
Need for Speed 3, Hot Pursuit
Need for Speed, Porsche
Net2Phone
NNTP
Operation FlashPoint
Outlaws
pcAnywhere (incoming)
POP-3
PPTP
Quake II
Quake III
Rainbow Six
RealAudio
Return to Castle Wolfenstein
Roger Wilco
Rogue Spear
ShoutCast Server
SMTP
SNMP
SSH server
StarCraft
Starfleet Command
StarLancer, v 1.0
Telnet
TFTP
Tiberian Sun: Command and
Conquer
Timbuktu
Total Annihilation
Ultima Online
Unreal Tournament Server
Urban Assault, v 1.0
VNC, Virtual Network Computing
Westwood Online, Command
and Conquer
Win2000 Terminal Server
XBox Live Games
Yahoo Messenger Chat
Yahoo Messenger Phone
ZNES
Links Bar
Define Custom Service
To configure a Custom Service, choose whether to use Port Forwarding or Trigger Ports.
• Port Forwarding forwards a range of WAN ports to an IP address on the LAN.
• Trigger Ports forwards a range of ports to an IP address on the LAN only after specific
outbound traffic “triggers” the feature.
Click the Next button.
If you chose Port Forwarding, the Port Range entry screen appears.
Port Forwarding forwards a range of WAN ports to an IP address on the LAN. Enter the following information:
91
• Service Name: A unique identifier for the Custom Service.
• Global Port Range: Range of ports on which incoming traffic will be received.
• Base Host Port: The port number at the start of the port range your Router should use
when forwarding traffic of the specified type(s) to the internal IP address.
• Protocol: Protocol type of Internet traffic, TCP or UDP.
Click the Next button.
If you chose Trigger Ports, the Trigger Ports entry screen appears.
Trigger Ports forwards a range of ports to an IP address on the LAN only after specific outbound traffic “triggers” the feature. Enter the following information:
• Service Name: A unique identifier for the Custom Service.
• Global Port Range: Range of ports on which incoming traffic will be received.
• Local Trigger Port: Port number of the type of outbound traffic that needs to happen
(will be the trigger) to then allow the configured ports for inbound traffic.
Example: Set the trigger port to 21 and configure a range of 25 – 110. You would need
to do an outbound ftp before you were able to do an inbound smtp.
Click the Next button.
92
Links Bar
Static NAT
This feature allows you to:
• Direct your Router to forward all externally initiated IP traffic (TCP and UDP protocols
only) to a default host on the LAN.
• Enable it for certain situations:
– Where you cannot anticipate what port number or packet protocol an in-bound application might use. For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers
when a connection is opened.
– When you want all unsolicited traffic to go to a specific LAN host.
This feature allows you to direct unsolicited or non-specific traffic to a designated LAN station. With NAT “On” in the Router, these packets normally would be discarded.
For instance, this could be application traffic where you don’t know (in advance) the port or
protocol that will be used. Some game applications fit this profile.
From the pull-down menu, select the address of the PC that you want to be your default
NAT destination.
Click the Next button, and your choice will be so designated.
93
Link: IPSec
When you click on the IPSec link, the IPSec configuration screen appears.
Your Gateway can support two mechanisms for IPSec tunnels:
• IPSec PassThrough supports Virtual Private Network (VPN) clients running on LANconnected computers. Normally, this feature is enabled.
You can disable it if your LAN-side VPN client includes its own NAT interoperability
option. Uncheck the Enable IPSec checkbox.
IPSec VPN
A VPN IPSec Tunnel provides a single, encrypted tunnel to be terminated on the Gateway,
making a secure tunnel available for all LAN- connected users. This implementation offers
the following:
• Eliminates the need for VPN client software on individual PCs.
• Reduces the complexity of tunnel configuration.
• Simplifies the ongoing maintenance for secure remote access.
94
Links Bar
Configuring an IPSec VPN Tunnel
Use the following procedure to configure your IPSec tunnel.
1.
2.
Obtain your configuration information from your network administrator.
The tables “Parameter Descriptions” on page 100 describe the various parameters that
may be required for your tunnel. Not all of them need to be changed from the defaults
for every VPN tunnel. Consult with your network administrator.
Complete the Parameter Setup worksheet “IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup
Worksheet” on page 96.
The worksheet provides spaces for you to enter your own specific values. You can print
the page for easy reference. IPSec tunnel configuration requires precise parameter
setup between VPN devices. The Setup Worksheet (page 96) facilitates setup and
assures that the associated variables are identical.
95
Table 1: IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup Worksheet
Parameter
Name
Peer Internal Network
Peer Internal Netmask
NAT Enable
PAT Address
Negotiation Method
Local ID Type
Local ID Address/Value
Local ID Mask
Remote ID Type
Remote ID Address/Value
Remote ID Mask
Pre-Shared Key Type
Pre-Shared Key
DH Group
PFS Enable
SA Encrypt Type
SA Hash Type
Invalid SPI Recovery
Soft MBytes
Soft Seconds
Hard MBytes
Hard Seconds
IPSec MTU
Xauth Enable
Xauth Username
Xauth Password
96
Motorola Netopia®
Gateway
On/Off
Main/Aggressive
IP Address
Subnet
Hostname
ASCII
IP Address
Subnet
Hostname
ASCII
HEX
ASCII
1/2/5
Off/On
DES
3DES
MD5
SHA1
Off/On
1 - 1000000
60 - 1000000
1 - 1000000
60 - 1000000
100 - 1500 (default)
Off/On
Peer Gateway
Links Bar
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check the Enable IPSec checkbox.
Click Add.
The Tunnel Configuration page appears.
Enter the tunnel Name.
This parameter does not have to match the peer/remote VPN device.
Enter the initial group of tunnel parameters.
Refer to your “IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup Worksheet” on page 96 and the
“Parameter Descriptions” on page 100 as required.
Select the Encryption Protocol from the pull-down menu.
Select the Authentication Protocol from the pull-down menu.
If you choose Aggressive from the Negotiation Method pull-down menu, additional
fields appear for you to supply applicable parameter information.
97
7.
Click the Submit button.
The Tunnel Details screen appears.
8.
Make the Tunnel Details entries.
Enter or select the required settings.
Soft MBytes, Soft Seconds, Hard MBytes, and Hard Seconds values do not have to
match the peer/remote VPN device.
Refer to your “IPSec Tunnel Details Parameter Setup Worksheet” on page 96.)
Click the Submit button.
9.
98
Links Bar
You will be returned to the IPSec configuration screen where your entries are displayed
in a list. You can return to this screen at any time to edit or delete your entries.
10.
Click the Save Changes button and, when prompted, restart your Router.
99
Parameter Descriptions
The following tables describe SafeHarbour’s parameters that are used for an IPSec VPN
tunnel configuration:
Table 2: IPSec Configuration page parameters
Field
Description
Name
The Name parameter refers to the name of the configured tunnel. This is
mainly used as an identifier for the administrator. The Name parameter is
an ASCII value and is limited to 31 characters. The tunnel name does not
need to match the peer gateway.
Peer External IP
Address
The Peer External IP Address is the public, or routable IP address of the
remote gateway or VPN server you are establishing the tunnel with.
Encryption
Protocol
Encryption protocol for the tunnel session.
Parameter values supported include NONE or ESP.
Authentication
Protocol
Authentication Protocol for IP packet header. The three parameter values
are None, Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) and Authentication Header
(AH)
Key Management
The Key Management algorithm manages the exchange of security keys in
the IPSec protocol architecture. SafeHarbour supports the standard Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters
Field
100
Description
Name
The Name parameter refers to the name of the configured tunnel. This is
mainly used as an identifier for the administrator. The Name parameter is
an ASCII value and is limited to 31 characters. The tunnel name does not
need to match the peer gateway.
Peer Internal
Network
The Peer Internal IP Network is the private, or Local Area Network (LAN)
address of the remote gateway or VPN Server you are communicating with.
Peer Internal
Netmask
The Peer Internal IP Netmask is the subnet mask of the Peer Internal IP
Network.
NAT enable
Turns NAT on or off for this tunnel.
Links Bar
Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters
PAT Address
If NAT is enabled, this field appears. You can specify a Port Address Translation (PAT) address or leave the default all-zeroes (if Xauth is enabled). If
you leave the default. the address will be requested from the remote router
and dynamically applied to the Gateway.
Negotiation
Method
This parameter refers to the method used during the Phase I key
exchange, or IKE process. SafeHarbour supports Main or Aggressive
Mode. Main mode requires 3 two-way message exchanges while Aggressive mode only requires 3 total message exchanges.
Local ID type
If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this option
appears. Selection options are: IP Address, Subnet, Hostname, ASCII
Local ID Address/
Value
If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this field
appears. This is the local (Gateway-side) IP address (or Name Value, if Subnet or Hostname are selected as the Local ID Type).
Local ID Mask
If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, and Subnet as
the Local ID Type, this field appears. This is the local (Gateway-side) subnet mask.
Remote ID Type
If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this option
appears. Selection options are: IP Address, Subnet, Hostname, ASCII.
Remote ID
Address/Value
If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, this field
appears. This is the remote (central-office-side) IP address (or Name Value,
if Subnet or Hostname are selected as the Local ID Type).
Remote ID Mask
If Aggressive mode is selected as the Negotiation Method, and Subnet as
the Remote ID Type, this field appears. This is the remote (central-officeside) subnet mask.
Pre-Shared Key
Type
The Pre-Shared Key Type classifies the Pre-Shared Key. SafeHarbour supports ASCII or HEX types
Pre-Shared Key
The Pre-Shared Key is a parameter used for authenticating each side. The
value can be ASCII or Hex and a maximum of 64 characters. ASCII is casesensitive.
DH Group
Diffie-Hellman is a public key algorithm used between two systems to
determine and deliver secret keys used for encryption. Groups 1, 2 and 5
are supported.
PFS Enable
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is used during SA renegotiation. When PFS
is selected, a Diffie-Hellman key exchange is required. If enabled, the PFS
DH group follows the IKE phase 1 DH group.
SA Encrypt Type
SA Encryption Type refers to the symmetric encryption type. This encryption algorithm will be used to encrypt each data packet. SA Encryption
Type values supported include DES and 3DES.
101
Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters
102
SA Hash Type
SA Hash Type refers to the Authentication Hash algorithm used during SA
negotiation. Values supported include MD5 and SHA1. N/A will display if
NONE is chosen for Auth Protocol.
Invalid SPI
Recovery
Enabling this allows the Gateway to re-establish the tunnel if either the
Netopia Gateway or the peer gateway is rebooted.
Soft MBytes
Setting the Soft MBytes parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec
Security Associations (SAs) at the configured Soft MByte value. The value
can be configured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to data traffic
passed. If this value is not achieved, the Hard MBytes parameter is
enforced. This parameter does not need to match the peer gateway.
Soft Seconds
Setting the Soft Seconds parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec
Security Associations (SAs) at the configured Soft Seconds value. The
value can be configured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds. This parameter does not need to match the peer gateway.
Hard MBytes
Setting the Hard MBytes parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec
Security Associations (SAs) at the configured Hard MByte value.
The value can be configured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to
data traffic passed. This parameter does not need to match the peer gateway.
Hard Seconds
Setting the Hard Seconds parameter forces the renegotiation of the IPSec
Security Associations (SAs) at the configured Hard Seconds value. The
value can be configured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds This parameter does not need to match the peer gateway.
IPSec MTU
Some ISPs require a setting of e.g. 1492 (or other value). The default
1500 is the most common and you usually don’t need to change this
unless otherwise instructed. Accepted values are from 100 – 1500.
This is the starting value that is used for the MTU when the IPSec tunnel is
installed. It specifies the maximum IP packet length for the encapsulated
AH or ESP packets sent by the router. The MTU used on the IPSec connection will be automatically adjusted based on the MTU value in any received
ICMP can't fragment error messages that correspond to IPSec traffic initiated from the router. Normally the MTU only requires manual configuration
if the ICMP error messages are blocked or otherwise not received by the
router.
Links Bar
Table 3: IPSec Tunnel Details page parameters
Xauth Enable
Extended Authentication (XAuth), an extension to the Internet Key
Exchange (IKE) protocol. The Xauth extension provides dual authentication
for a remote user’s Motorola Netopia® Gateway to establish a VPN, authorizing network access to the user’s central office. IKE establishes the tunnel, and Xauth authenticates the specific remote user's Gateway. Since
NAT is supported over the tunnel, the remote user network can have multiple PCs behind the client Gateway accessing the VPN. By using XAuth, network VPN managers can centrally control remote user authentication.
Xauth Username/
Password
Xauth authentication credentials.
103
Link: Router Password
When you click Router Password, the Router Password page appears.
By default, your Gateway requires no password to access the administrative web-based
user interface. If you wish to secure administrative access to your Gateway, you can optionally enable a password challenge by enabling a local Admin password login.
Use the following procedure to create or change an Administrative (Admin) password for
your Netopia Gateway:
• Enter your new password in the New Password field.
Motorola’s rules for a Password are:
- It can have up to eight alphanumeric characters.
- It is case-sensitive.
• Enter your new password again in the Confirm Password field.
You confirm the new password to verify that you entered it correctly the first time.
Password changes are automatically saved, and take effect immediately.
Click the Save Changes button.
104
Links Bar
Link: Time Zone
When you click the Time Zone link, the Time Zone page appears.
You can set your local time zone by selecting your time zone from the pull-down menu. This
allows you to set the time zone for access controls (and in general).
105
Link: VLAN
When you click VLAN, the VLANs page appears.
Overview
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network of computers or other devices that
behave as if they are connected to the same wire even though they may be physically
located on different segments of a LAN. You set up VLANs by configuring the Gateway software rather than hardware. This makes VLANs very flexible. VLANs behave like separate
and independent networks.
Beginning with Version 7.7.4, VLANs are now strictly layer 2 entities. They can be thought
of as virtual Ethernet switches, into which can be added: Ethernet ports, router IP interfaces, ATM PVC/VCC interfaces, SSIDs, and any other physical port such as USB, HPNA,
or MOCA. This allows great flexibility on how the components of a system are connected to
each other.
VLANs are part of Motorola’s VGx Virtual Gateway technology which allows individual portbased VLANs to be treated as separate and distinct “channels.” When data is passed to a
Motorola Netopia VGx-enabled broadband gateway, specific policies, routing, and prioritiza-
106
Links Bar
tion parameters can be applied to each individual service, delivering that service to the
appropriate peripheral device with the required level of quality of service (QoS). In effect, a
single Motorola gateway acts as separate virtual gateways for each distinct service being
delivered.
Motorola’s VGx technology maps multiple local VLANs to one or more specific permanent
virtual circuits (PVCs) for DSL, or wide area network VLANs for a fiber network. VGx provides service segmentation and QoS controls, service management, and supports delivery
of triple play applications: voice for IP Telephony, video for IPTV, and data.
Your Gateway supports the following:
• Port-based VLANs - these can be used when no trunking is required
• Global VLANs - these are used when trunking is required on any port member of the
VLAN
- Supports 802.1q and 802.1p; both are configurable
• Routed VLANs
- WAN-side VLAN with Multiple WAN IPoE interface support and IP interface-to-VLAN
binding
- LAN-side VLAN with IP interface-to-VLAN binding
- Inter-VLAN routing
• Bridged VLANs - these VLANs are used to bridge traffic from LAN to WAN
• Prioritization per VLAN and per port
Ethernet Switching/Policy Setup
Before you configure any VLANs, the unconfigured Gateway is set up as a router composed
of a LAN switch, a WAN switch, and a router in the middle, with LAN and WAN IP interfaces
connected to their respective switches. These bindings between Ethernet switch ports, IP
LAN interface, IP WAN interface and WAN physical ports are automatically created.
When you configure any VLANs, the default bindings are no longer valid, and the system
requires explicit binding between IP interfaces and layer 2 interfaces. Each VLAN can be
thought of as a layer 2 switch, and enabling each port or interface in a VLAN is analogous
to plugging it in to the layer 2 switch.
Thereafter, in order for devices to communicate on layer 2, they must be associated in the
same VLAN. For devices to communicate at layer 3, the devices must be either on the
same VLAN, or on VLANs that have an Inter-VLAN routing group enabled in common.
107
When configuring VLANs you must define how traffic needs to be forwarded:
• If traffic needs to be bridged between LAN and WAN you can create a single VLAN that
encompasses the WAN port and LAN ports.
• If traffic needs to be routed then you must define four elements:
• LAN-side VLANs
• WAN-side VLANs
• Associate IP Interfaces to VLANs
• Inter-VLAN Routing Groups: configuration of routing between VLANs is done by association of a VLAN to a Routing Group. Traffic will be routed between VLANs within a routing group. The LAN IP Ethernet Interface can be bound to multiple LAN VLANs, but
forwarding can be limited between an Ethernet LAN port and a WAN VLAN if you properly
configure Inter-VLAN groups.
Inter-VLAN groups are also used to block routing between WAN interfaces. If each WAN
IP interface is bound to its own VLAN and if you configure a different Inter-VLAN group
for each WAN VLAN then no routing between WAN IP interfaces is possible.
• Example: to route between a VCC and all the LAN ports, which effectively is similar to
the default configuration without any VLANs:
Create a VLAN named “VccWan” consisting of vcc1, ip-vcc1, routing-group 1
Create a VLAN named “Lan” consisting of eth0.1, eth0.2, eth0.3, eth0.4, ssid1, ssid2,
ssid3, ssid4 (etc.), ip-eth-a, routing-group 1
108
Links Bar
An example of multiple VLANs, using a Motorola Netopia® Gateway with VGx managed
switch technology, is shown below:
A VLAN Model Combining Bridging and Routing
109
To configure VLANs check the Enable checkbox.
To create a VLAN select a list item from the main VLAN page and click the Edit button.
The VLAN Entry page appears.
Check the Enable checkbox, and enter a descriptive name for the VLAN.
110
Links Bar
You can create up to 16 VLANs, and you can also restrict any VLAN, and the computers on
it, from administering the Gateway.
• VLAN Name – A descriptive name for the VLAN.
• Type – LAN or WAN Port(s) can be enabled on the VLAN. You can choose a type designation as follows:
By-Port: indicating that the VLAN is port-based. Traffic sent to this port will be treated
as belonging to the VLAN, and will not be forwarded to other ports that are not within a
common VLAN segment.
Global: indicating that the ports joining this VLAN are part of a global 802.1q Ethernet
VLAN. This VLAN includes ports on this Router and may include ports within other
devices throughout the network. The VID in this case may define the behavior of traffic
between all devices on the network having ports that are members of this VLAN segment.
111
• VLAN ID – If you select Global as the VLAN Type, the VLAN ID field appears for you to
enter a VID. This must be a unique identifying number between 1 and 4094. (A VID of
zero (0) is permitted on the Ethernet WAN port only.)
• Admin Restricted – If you want to prevent administrative access to the Gateway from
this VLAN, check the checkbox.
• 802.1p Priority Bit: If you set this from the pull-down menu to a value greater than 0,
all packets of this VLAN with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority.
Click the Submit button.
112
Links Bar
The Port Configuration screen appears.
• Port interfaces available for this VLAN are listed in the left hand column.
• Displayed port interfaces vary depending on the kinds of physical ports on your Gateway, for example, Ethernet, USB, and/or wireless.
• Also, if you have multiple wireless SSIDs defined, these may be displayed as well (See
Multiple Wireless IDs on page 136)
• For Motorola Netopia® VGx technology models, separate Ethernet switch ports are displayed and may be configured.
To enable any of them on this VLAN, check the associated Enable checkbox(es).
Typically you will choose a physical port, such as an Ethernet port (example: eth0.1) or
a wireless SSID (example: ssid1).
113
• When you enable an interface, the Tag, Priority, and Promote checkboxes and an
802.1p Priority Bit pull-down menu appear for that interface.
Tag – Packets transmitted from this port through this VLAN must be tagged with the
VLAN VID. Packets received through this port destined for this VLAN must be tagged
with the VLAN VID by the source. The Tag option is only available on Global type ports.
Priority – Use any 802.1p priority bits in the VLAN header to prioritize packets within
the Gateway’s internal queues, according to DiffServ priority mapping rules.
Promote – Write any 802.1p priority bits into the IP-TOS header bit field for received IP
packets on this port destined for this VLAN. Write any IP-TOS priority bits into the
802.1p priority bit field for tagged IP packets transmitted from this port for this VLAN.
All mappings between Ethernet 802.1p and IP-TOS are made according to a pre-defined
QoS mapping policy. The pre-defined mapping can now be set in the CLI. See “Queue
Configuration” on page 231.
802.1p Priority Bit – If you set this field to a value greater than 0, all packets received
on this port with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority. If the
port 802.1p PBit is greater than 0, the VLAN 802.1p PBit setting is ignored.
114
Links Bar
• Select an IP Interface for this VLAN. These selections will vary depending on your IP
interfaces. For example, if you have set up multiple VCCs, these will appear in the list
as ip-vcc1, ip-vcc2, and so forth.
• When you select an IP interface, the screen expands to allow you to configure InterVlan-Groups.
Inter-VLAN groups allow VLANs in the group to route traffic to the others; ungrouped
VLANs cannot route traffic to each other.
• Click the Submit button.
• If you want to create more VLANs, repeat the process.
115
You can Edit, Clear, Enable, or Disable your VLAN entries by returning to the VLANs page,
and selecting the appropriate entry from the displayed list.
• When you are finished, click the Save Changes button.
• Click the Restart Device button.
To view the settings for each VLAN, select the desired VLAN from the list and click the
Details button.
116
Links Bar
The screen expands to display the VLAN settings.
117
Example
You want to configure a 3347-02 Gateway with two SSIDs (see “Enable Multiple Wireless
IDs” on page 136 for more information) for two VLANs, allowing both access to the Internet. One SSID will be in the same VLAN as the four ports of the Ethernet Switch, so that
those two networks can communicate. The second VLAN will be for the other SSID. The
second VLAN will also be denied access to the 3347NWG-VGx web interface and telnet
interface. This setup might be useful if you have a doctor’s office or a coffee shop, and you
want to keep your customers separated from the rest of the network.
1.
118
In the VLANs page, check the Enable checkbox, select VLAN #1 in the VLANs list,
and click the Edit button.
Links Bar
2.
3.
4.
Check the Enable checkbox, and in the VLAN Name box, enter the name you would
like.
For example, call it Network A.
Since this VLAN will be for SSID1 and the Ethernet ports, leave Admin Restricted
unchecked. This will give this VLAN access to the Gateway.
Click the Submit button.
In the Port Configuration for VLAN:1 page, you add the Port Interfaces you want associated with the VLAN.
119
5.
6.
120
In this case, select all the physical Ethernet ports: eth0.1 through eth0.4, and wireless
ssid1. Select ip-eth-a, the IP interface for the group. This will be Inter-Vlan-Group #1.
Check the Group-1 checkbox. These ports will be able to communicate with each other.
Click the Submit button.
In the VLAN page, select VLAN #2 in the VLANs list, and click the Edit button.
Links Bar
7.
The VLAN Name must be given another unique name. For example, call it Network B.
Since this is for the second SSID that we don’t want to be given access to the Gateway,
check the Admin Restricted checkbox.
Click the Submit button.
121
8.
9.
122
In the Port Configuration for VLAN: 2 page, you add the Port Interfaces you want
associated with the VLAN.
Select the ip-eth-a port interface and check the ssid2 port interface. Make this VLAN a
member of Inter-Vlan-Group Group-2.
Click the Submit button.
Links Bar
10.
Next, create a VLAN to provide the Inter-Vlan-Groups access to the Internet (WAN).
11.
For example, call it WAN VLAN.
Click the Submit button.
123
Check the vcc1 checkbox, select the ip-vcc1 IP interface, and check the Inter-VlanGroup Group-1 and Group-2 checkboxes. Members of Groups 1 and 2 will now be able
to communicate with the Internet (WAN), but not with each other.
12. When you are finished, click the Submit button, then the Save Changes button.
13. When prompted to Save and Restart Connection, click the Yes button.
124
Links Bar
Link: Wireless
(supported models only)
When you click Wireless, the 3-D Reach Wireless configuration page appears.
Enable Wireless
The wireless function is automatically enabled by default. If you uncheck the Enable Wireless checkbox, the Wireless Options are disabled, and the Gateway will not provide or
broadcast any wireless LAN services.
Wireless ID (SSID)
The Wireless ID is preset to a number unique to your unit. You can either leave it as is, or
change it by entering a freeform name of up to 32 characters, for example “Hercule’s Wireless LAN”. On client PCs’ software, this might also be called the Network Name. The Wireless ID is used to identify this particular wireless LAN. Depending on their operating
system or client wireless card, users must either:
• select from a list of available wireless LANs that appear in a scanned list on their client
125
• or enter this name on their clients in order to join this wireless LAN.
Privacy
The pull-down menu for enabling Privacy offers four settings: WPA-802.1x, WPA-PSK,
WEP-Manual, and Off - No Privacy.
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT YOU ENABLE SOME FORM OF PRIVACY
FOR THE SECURITY OF YOUR WIRELESS NETWORK.
See “Privacy” on page 130 for more information.
126
Links Bar
Advanced Configuration Options (optional)
When you click the Advanced Configuration Options button, the Advanced 802.11
Wireless screen appears. This screen varies its options depending on which form of wireless Privacy you have selected.
Operating Mode
The pull-down menu allows you to select and lock the Gateway into the wireless transmission mode you want. For compatibility with clients using 802.11b (up to 11 Mbps transmission) and 802.11g (up to 20+ Mbps), select Normal (802.11b + g). To limit your wireless
LAN to one mode or the other, select 802.11b Only, or 802.11g Only.
☛
NOTE:
If you choose to limit the operating mode to 802.11b or 802.11g only, clients
using the mode you excluded will not be able to connect.
127
Default Channel
(1 through 11, for North America) on which the network will broadcast. This is a frequency
range within the 2.4Ghz band. Channel selection depends on government regulated radio
frequencies that vary from region to region. The widest range available is from 1 to 14.
Europe, France, Spain and Japan differ. Channel selection can have a significant impact on
performance, depending on other wireless activity close to this Router. Channel selection
is not necessary at the client computers; the clients will scan the available channels seeking access points using the same SSID as the client.
AutoChannel Setting
For 802.11G models, AutoChannel is a feature that allows the Netopia Gateway to determine the best channel to broadcast automatically.
Three settings are available from the pull-down menu: Off-Use default, At Startup, and
Continuous.
• Off-Use default: the Netopia Gateway will use the configured default channel selected
from the previous pull-down menu.
• At Startup – the default setting – causes the Netopia Gateway at startup to briefly initialize on the default channel, then perform a full two- to three-second scan, and switch
to the best channel it can find, remaining on that channel until the next reboot.
• Continuous performs the at-startup scan, and will continuously monitor the current
channel for any other Access Point beacons. If an Access Point beacon is detected on
the same channel, the Netopia Gateway will initiate a three- to four-minute scan of the
channels, locate a better one, and switch. Once it has switched, it will remain on this
channel for at least 30 minutes before switching again if another Access Point is
detected.
Enable Closed System Mode
If enabled, Closed System Mode hides the wireless network from the scanning features of
wireless client computers. Unless both the wireless clients and the Router share the same
Wireless ID in Closed System mode, the Router’s wireless LAN will not appear as an available network when scanned for by wireless-enabled computers. Members of the Closed
System WLAN must log onto the Router’s wireless network with the identical SSID as that
configured in the router.
Closed System mode is an ideal way to increase wireless security and to prevent casual
detection by unwanted neighbors, office users, or malicious users such as hackers.
128
Links Bar
If you do not enable Closed System Mode, it is more convenient, but potentially less
secure, for clients to access your WLAN by scanning available access points. You must
decide based on your own network requirements.
About Closed System Mode and Wireless Encryption
Enabling Closed System Mode on your wireless Router provides another level of security,
since your wireless LAN will no longer appear as an available access point to client PCs
that are casually scanning for one.
Your own wireless network clients, however, must log into the wireless LAN by using the
exact SSID of the Motorola Netopia® Router.
In addition, if you have enabled WEP or WPA encryption on the Motorola Netopia® Router,
your network clients must also have WEP or WPA encryption enabled, and must have the
same WEP or WPA encryption key as the Motorola Netopia® Router.
Once the Motorola Netopia® Gateway is located by a client computer, by setting the client
to a matching SSID, the client can connect immediately if WEP or WPA is not enabled. If
WEP or WPA is enabled then the client must also have WEP or WPA enabled and a matching
WEP or WPA key.
Wireless client cards from different manufacturers and different operating systems accomplish connecting to a wireless LAN and enabling WEP or WPA in a variety of ways. Consult
the documentation for your particular wireless card and/or operating system.
Block Wireless Bridging
Check the checkbox to block wireless clients from communicating with other wireless clients on the LAN side of the Gateway.
129
Privacy
• OFF - No Privacy: This mode disables privacy on your network, allowing any wireless
users to connect to your wireless LAN. Use this option if you are using alternative security measures such as VPN tunnels, or if your network is for public use.
• WEP - Manual: WEP Security is a Privacy option that is based on encryption between
the Router and any PCs (“clients”) you have with wireless cards. If you are not using
WPA-PSK Privacy, you can use WEP Encryption instead. For this encryption to work, both
your Router and each client must share the same Wireless ID, and both must be using
the same encryption keys.
• WPA-802.1x provides RADIUS server authentication support. See RADIUS Server
authentication below.
• WPA-PSK provides Wireless Protected Access, the most secure option for your wireless network. See “WPA-PSK” on page 133. This mechanism provides the best data
protection and access control.
Be sure that your Wi-Fi client adapter supports this option. Not all Wi-Fi clients support
WPA-PSK.
130
Links Bar
RADIUS Server authentication
RADIUS servers allow external authentication of users by means of a remote authentication database. The remote authentication database is maintained by a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server. In conjunction with Wireless User Authentication,
you can use a RADIUS server database to authenticate users seeking access to the wireless services, as well as the authorized user list maintained locally within the Gateway.
If you select WPA-802.1x, the screen expands.
Click the Configure RADIUS Server button.
131
The Configure RADIUS Server screen appears.
Enter your RADIUS Server information in the appropriate fields:
• RADIUS Server Addr/Name: The default RADIUS server name or IP address that you
want to use.
• RADIUS Server Secret: The RADIUS secret key used by this server. The shared secret
should have the same characteristics as a normal password.
• Alt RADIUS Server Addr/Name: An alternate RADIUS server name or IP address, if
available.
• Alt RADIUS Server Secret: The RADIUS secret key used by this alternate server. The
shared secret should have the same characteristics as a normal password.
• RADIUS Server Port: The port on which the RADIUS server is listening, typically, the
default 1812.
Click the Save Changes button.
132
Links Bar
WPA-PSK
One of the easiest ways to enable Privacy on your Wireless network is by selecting
WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access) from the pull-down menu.
The screen expands to allow you to enter a Pre Shared Key. The key can be between 8
and 63 characters, but for best security it should be at least 20 characters. When you have
entered your key, click the Save Changes button.
133
WEP-Manual
Alternatively, you can enable WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption by selecting
WEP-Manual from the Privacy pull-down menu.
You can provide a level of data security by enabling WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) for
encryption of network data. You can enable 40-, 128-, or 256-bit WEP Encryption (depending on the capability of your client wireless card) for IP traffic on your LAN.
134
Links Bar
WEP - Manual allows you to enter your own encryption keys manually. This is a difficult
process, but only needs to be done once. Avoid the temptation to enter all the same characters.
Encryption Key Size #1 – #4: Selects the length of each encryption key. The longer the
key, the stronger the encryption and the more difficult it is to break the encryption.
Encryption Key #1 – #4: The encryption keys. You enter keys using hexadecimal digits.
For 40/64bit encryption, you need ten digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58 digits for 256bit
WEP. Hexadecimal characters are 0 – 9, and a – f.
Examples:
• 40bit: 02468ACE02
• 128bit: 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789
• 256bit: 592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F21A09C
Use WEP encryption key (1 – 4) #: Specifies which key the Gateway will use to encrypt
transmitted traffic. The default is key #1.
Click the click Save Changes button.
Any WEP-enabled client must have an identical key of the same length as the Router, in
order to successfully receive and decrypt the traffic. Similarly, the client also has a
‘default’ key that it uses to encrypt its transmissions. In order for the Router to receive the
client’s data, it must likewise have the identical key of the same length.
135
Enable Multiple Wireless IDs
This feature allows you to add additional network identifiers (SSIDs or Network Names) for
your wireless network. To enable Multiple Wireless IDs, click the button.
The Enable Multiple Wireless IDs screen appears to allow you to add up to three additional Wireless IDs.
When the Multiple Wireless SSIDs screen appears, check the Enable SSID checkbox for
each SSID you want to enable.
The screen expands to allow you to name each additional Wireless ID, and specify a Privacy mode for each one.
136
Links Bar
Privacy modes available from the pull-down menu for the multiple SSIDs are: WPA-PSK,
WPA-802.1x, or Off-No Privacy.
These additional Wireless IDs are “Closed System Mode” Wireless IDs (see below) that
will not be shown by a client scan, and therefore must be manually configured at the client.
In addition, wireless bridging between clients is disabled for all members of these additional network IDs.
Click the Save Changes button. The Gateway will prompt you to restart it.
137
Click the Yes button, and the Gateway will restart with your new settings.
☛
NOTES:
The Gateway supports up to 4 different SSIDs:
• One SSID is broadcast by default and has wireless bridging enabled by
default.
• Three additional SSIDs are in “Closed System Mode” and have wireless
bridging disabled.
• These network IDs cannot be configured separately in terms of MAC
Address filtering.
• You can configure privacy on one SSID and disable it on another SSID.
138
Links Bar
WiFi Multimedia
WiFi Multimedia is an advanced feature that allows you to prioritize various types of data
travelling over the wireless network. Certain types of data that are sensitive to delays,
such as voice or video, must be prioritized ahead of other, less delay-sensitive types, such
as email.
WiFi Multimedia currently implements wireless Quality of Service (QoS) by transmitting
data depending on Diffserv priority settings. These priorities are mapped into four Access
Categories (AC), in increasing order of priority:
•
•
•
•
Background (BK),
Best Effort (BE),
Video (VI), and
Voice (VO).
It requires WiFi Multimedia (WMM)-capable clients, usually a separate feature enabled at
the client network settings, and client PC software that makes use of Differentiated Services (Diffserv). Refer to your operating system instructions for enabling Diffserv QoS.
When you click the WiFi Multimedia button the WiFi Multimedia page appears.
To enable the WiFi Multimedia custom settings, select Diffserv from the pull-down menu.
139
The screen expands.
Router EDCA Parameters (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access) govern wireless data
from your Gateway to the client; Client EDCA Parameters govern wireless data from the
client to your Gateway.
☛
NOTE:
It is not recommended that you modify these settings without direct knowledge or instructions to do so. Modifying these settings inappropriately could
seriously degrade network performance.
• AIFs: (Arbitration Interframe Spacing) the wait time in milliseconds for data frames.
• cwMin: (Minimum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range for determining initial random backoff. The value you choose must be lower than cwMax.
140
Links Bar
• cwMax: (Maximum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range of
determining final random backoff. The value you choose must be higher than cwMin.
• TXOP Limit: Time interval in microseconds that clients may initiate transmissions.
(When Operating Mode is B-only, default values are used and this field is not configurable.)
Click the Save Changes button.
Wireless MAC Authorization (optional)
MAC Authorization allows you to specify which client PCs are allowed to join the wireless
LAN by unique hardware (MAC) address. To enable this feature, click the Limit Wireless
Access by MAC Address button. The MAC Authorization screen appears.
Select Enabled from the pull-down menu.
141
The screen expands to permit you to add MAC addresses.
Click the Add button.
Once it is enabled, only entered MAC addresses that have been set to Allow will be
accepted onto the wireless LAN. All unlisted addresses will be blocked, in addition to the
listed addresses with Allow disabled.
142
Links Bar
Click the Submit button.
When you are finished adding MAC addresses click the Save Changes button. You will
be returned to the 802.11 Wireless page. You can Add, Edit, or Delete any of your entries
later by returning to this page.
143
Link: Status
When you click the Status link, the Links Bar expands to display nine statistical sub-headings.
These screens will vary depending on your Gateway’s model and traffic
activity:
•“DSL” on page 144
•“ATM” on page 145
•“Ethernet” on page 145
•“IP” on page 145
•“LAN” on page 146
•“USB” on page 147
•“Wireless” on page 146
•“Logs” on page 147
•“User List” on page 148
DSL
When you click DSL, the DSL Statistics page appears.
The DSL Statistics page displays information about the Router's WAN connection to the
Internet.
• Line State: May be Up (connected) or Down (disconnected).
• Modulation: Method of regulating the DSL signal. DMT (Discrete MultiTone) allows connections to work better when certain radio transmitters are present.
• Data Path: Type of path used by the device's processor.
Downstream and Upstream statistics
• Max Allowed Speed (kbps): Your maximum speeds for downloading (receiving) and
uploading (sending) data on the DSL line, in kilobits per second.
144
Links Bar
• SN Margin (db): Signal to noise margin, in decibels. Reflects the amount of unwanted
“noise” on the DSL line.
• Line Attenuation: Amount of reduction in signal strength on the DSL line, in decibels.
• CRC Errors: Number of times data packets have had to be resent due to errors in
transmission or reception.
ATM
When you click ATM, the ATM Statistics page appears.
The ATM Statistics page displays detailed statistics about the upstream and downstream
data traffic handled by your Router. Displays the Virtual Circuit (VPI/VCI) settings as well as
information about your PPPoE session if operating in PPPoE mode. This information is useful for troubleshooting and when seeking technical support.
Ethernet
When you click Ethernet, the Ethernet Statistics page appears.
The Ethernet Statistics page:
• displays your Router's unique hardware (MAC) address.
• displays detailed statistics about your LAN data traffic, upstream and downstream.
IP
When you click IP, the IP Statistics page appears. The IP Statistics page displays the IP
interfaces and routing table information about your network.
General
• IP WAN Address: The public IP address of your Router, whether dynamically or statically assigned.
• IP Gateway: Your ISP's gateway router IP address
• Primary DNS: The IP address of the Primary Domain Name Server
• Primary DNS name: The name of the Primary Domain Name Server
• Secondary DNS: The IP address of the backup Domain Name Server (if any)
• Secondary DNS name: The name of the backup Domain Name Server (if any)
145
IP interfaces
• Address: Your Router's IP address as seen from your internal network (LAN), and from
the public Internet (WAN)
• Netmask: The subnet mask for the respective IP interfaces (LAN and WAN)
• Name: The name of each IP interface (example:Eth0, WAN2)
Network Routing Table and Host Routing Table
The Routing tables display all of the IP routes currently known to your Router.
LAN
When you click LAN, the LAN Statistics page appears.
The LAN Statistics page displays detailed information about your LAN IP configuration and
names and IP addresses of devices on your LAN.
• Router IP Address: The IP address of your Router as seen from the LAN
• DHCP Netmask: Subnet mask of your LAN
• DHCP Start Address: First IP address in the range being served to your LAN by the
Router's DHCP server
• DHCP End Address: Last IP address in the range being served to your LAN by the
Router's DHCP server
• DHCP Server Status: May be On or Off
• DNS Server: The IP address of the default DNS server
Devices on LAN
Displays the IP Address, MAC (hardware) Address, and network Name for each device on
your LAN connected to the Router.
Wireless
(supported models only)
When you click Wireless, the Wireless Statistics page appears.
The Wireless Statistics page:
• displays your Router's unique hardware Wireless (MAC) address.
• displays detailed statistics about your Wireless LAN data traffic, upstream and downstream.
146
Links Bar
USB
(supported models only)
When you click USB, the USB Statistics page appears.
The USB Statistics page:
• displays your Router's unique hardware (MAC) address.
• displays detailed statistics about your LAN data traffic, upstream and downstream.
Logs
When you click Logs, the Logs page appears.
Select a log from the pull-down menu (the pull-down menu is available from every Log
page):
• All: Displays the entire system log.
• Connection: Displays events logged for the WAN connection.
• System: Displays events logged for the Router system configuration.
147
The CURRENT Router STATUS is displayed for all logs.
• To clear the individual logs, click the Clear Log button for that page.
• To clear all the logs, click the Clear All Logs button on the main Logs page.
• You can save logs to a text (.CTXT) file by clicking the Save to File button. This will
download the file to your browser’s default download location on your hard drive. The
file can be opened with your favorite text editor.
☛
Note:
Some browsers, such as Internet Explorer for Windows XP, require that you
specify the Motorola Netopia® Gateway’s URL as a “Trusted site” in “Internet
Options: Security”.
User List
When you click User List, the User List Statistics page appears.
The User List Statistics page:
• displays Ethernet Users’ PC Name, IP Address, and MAC Address.
• displays Wireless SSID Users’ PC Name, IP Address, and MAC Address.
If you have multiple SSIDs defined (see “Enable Multiple Wireless IDs” on page 136),
Wireless SSID users are displayed by their respective SSID.
148
Links Bar
Link: Diagnostics
When you click Diagnostics, the Diagnostics page appears.
This automated multi-layer test examines the functionality of the Router from the physical
connections to the data traffic being sent by users through the Router.
You enter a web address, such as tftp.netopia.com, or a known IP address, in the Web
Address field and click the Test button. Results will be displayed in the Progress Window
as they are generated.
149
This sequence of tests takes approximately one minute to generate results. Please wait for
the test to run to completion. Each test generates one of the following result codes:
Result
150
Meaning
* PASS:
The test was successful.
* FAIL:
The test was unsuccessful.
* SKIPPED:
The test was skipped because a test on which it depended failed.
* PENDING:
The test timed out without producing a result. Try running Diagnostics again.
* WARNING:
The test was unsuccessful. The Service Provider equipment your Router connects to may not support this test.
Links Bar
Link: Remote Access
When you click Remote Access, the Enable Remote Access page appears.
This link allows you to authorize a remotely-located person, such as a support technician,
to directly access your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. This is useful for fixing configuration
problems when you need expert help. You can limit the amount of time such a person will
have access to your Gateway. This will prevent unauthorized individuals from gaining
access after the time limit has expired.
• Enter a temporary password for the person you want to authorize.
• Select a Timeout period for this password, from the pull-down menu (5 – 30 minutes,
or Unlimited). Remote Access authorization lasts for a selected period of inactivity, after
which it is automatically disabled again, to protect against unauthorized access
attempts to your Router. Selecting Unlimited will enable remote access until the Router
is rebooted. Be sure to tell the authorized person what the password is, and for how
long the time-out is set.
• “Permanent” remote access to the router (i.e. access which is not disabled after the
router is rebooted) may be configured in the CLI. See the command “set ip dsl vccn
restrictions { admin-disabled | none }” on page 216. To make remote access “permanent,” you would use the option none. This is not a recommended practice, but may
be needed for some applications.
Click the Enable button. You can manually disable it, before the timeout period ends,
by clicking the Disable button, or by restarting the Router.
151
Link: Update Router
When you click Update Router, the Software Upgrade page appears.
Operating System Software is what makes your Router run and occasionally it needs to be
updated. Your Current Software Version is displayed at the top of the page.
(example screen – your screen may vary)
If you want to check for an updated version without installing it, click the
Check Software from Server link.
From a Server
• If an updated version exists, click the Update Software from Server button, and a new
version will automatically be downloaded to your Router.
• When the download and installation is complete, you will be prompted to restart the
Router.
152
Links Bar
Link: Reset Router
You might need to reset your Router to its factory default state, and clear all of your previous settings. The Reset Router link allows you to do that. When you click the link, you will
be challenged to confirm that this is what you want to do.
If you want to clear your settings, click the Yes, reset to factory settings button. The
Router configuration will be reset to the factory default. Any configuration information you
have entered will be lost and will have to be re-entered. The Router is restarted automatically.
153
Link: Restart Router
When the Gateway is restarted, it will disconnect all users, initialize all its interfaces, and
copy the Operating System Software and feature keys from its internal storage.
154
Basic Mode
Basic Mode
When you click Basic Mode, you will be returned to the Basic Mode Home Page.
155
Help
When you click the Help link in the left-hand column of links a page of explanatory information displays. Help is available for every page in the Web interface.
Here is an example from the Home page:
156
CHAPTER 4
Basic Troubleshooting
This section gives some simple suggestions for troubleshooting problems with your Gateway’s initial configuration.
Before troubleshooting, make sure you have
• read the Quickstart Guide;
• plugged in all the necessary cables; and
• set your PC’s TCP/IP controls to obtain an IP address automatically.
157
Status Indicator Lights
The first step in troubleshooting is to check the status indicator lights (LEDs) in the order
outlined in the following section.
Motorola Netopia® Gateway 3347-02 status indicator lights
Internet
DSL
Power Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4 Wireless
158
LED
Action
Power
Green when power is on. Red when updating embedded
software, or for system failure.
Ethernet 1, 2, 3, 4
Solid green when connected. Flash green when there is
activity on the LAN. Red when bad userid and password
are entered.
Wireless
Flashes green when there is activity on the wireless
LAN.
DSL
Solid green when Internet connection is established.
Internet
Solid green when router is connected. Flashes green
when transmitting or receiving data.
Status Indicator Lights
LED Function Summary Matrix
Power
DSL
Internet
Ethernet
Wireless
Unlit
No power
No signal
No signal
No signal
No signal
Solid
Green
Power on
Internet connection is
established.
Router is connected.
Synched with
Ethernet card
Synched with
WLAN
Flashing
Green
N/A
Activity on the
DSL cable
Transmitting
or receiving
data.
Activity on the
Ethernet
cable
Activity on the
WLAN
Red
Updating
embedded
software, or
for system
failure.
N/A
N/A
Bad userid
and password are
entered.
N/A
If a status indicator light does not look correct, look for these possible problems:
If LED is
not Lit
Power
DSL
Possible problems
•
•
•
•
Make sure the power switch is in the ON position.
Make sure the power adapter is plugged into the DSL Router properly.
Try a known good wall outlet.
Replace the power supply and/or unit.
•
•
Make sure that any telephone has a microfilter installed.
Make sure the you are using the correct cable. The DSL cable is the thinner standard telephone cable.
Make sure the DSL cable is plugged into the correct wall jack.
Make sure the DSL cable is plugged into the DSL port on the DSL Router.
Make sure the DSL line has been activated at the central office DSLAM.
Make sure the DSL Router is not plugged into a micro filter.
Launch a browser and try to browse the Internet. If the DSL Active light still does not flash,
then proceed to Advanced Troubleshooting.
•
•
•
•
•
159
•
Ethernet
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wireless
•
•
•
160
Make sure the you are using the Ethernet cable, not the DSL cable. The Ethernet cable is
thicker than the standard telephone cable.
Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely plugged into the Ethernet jack on the PC.
Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely plugged into the Ethernet port on the DSL Router.
Try another Ethernet cable if you have one available.
Make sure you have Ethernet drivers installed on the PC.
Make sure the PC’s TCP/IP Properties for the Ethernet Network Control Panel is set to obtain
an IP address via DHCP.
Make sure the PC has obtained an address in the 192.168.1.x range. (You may have changed
the subnet addressing.)
Make sure the PC is configured to access the Internet over a LAN.
Disable any installed network devices (Ethernet, HomePNA, wireless) that are not being used
to connect to the DSL Router.
Make sure your client PC(s) have their wireless cards correctly installed and configured.
Check your client PC(s) TCP/IP settings to make sure they are receiving an IP address from the
wireless Router.
Check the Router’s log for wireless driver failure messages.
Factory Reset Switch
Factory Reset Switch
Lose your password? This section shows how to reset the Netopia Gateway so that you
can access the configuration screens once again.
☛
NOTE: Keep in mind that all of your settings will need to be reconfigured.
If you don't have a password, the only way to access the Netopia Gateway is the following:
1.
Referring to the following diagram, find the round Reset Switch opening.
Rear View
Factory Reset Switch: Push to clear all settings
2.
3.
4.
Carefully insert the point of a pen or an unwound paperclip into the opening.
Hold the button in until the “Power” LED turns RED and then hold it in until it turns
GREEN again.
If you don't hold it this long, the normal configuration will be cleared, but not all the configuration info (default settings, etc.) – in some cases you may NOT want to clear all the
default settings, as well. This entire process takes approximately 10 seconds: approximately five seconds for the Gateway to reboot and the LED to turn RED; then approximately three seconds for it to turn GREEN again.
This will reset the unit to factory defaults and you will now be able to reprogram the
Netopia Gateway.
161
162
CHAPTER 5
Command Line Interface
The Motorola Netopia® Gateway operating software includes a command line interface
(CLI) that lets you access your Motorola Netopia® Gateway over a telnet connection. You
can use the command line interface to enter and update the unit’s configuration settings,
monitor its performance, and restart it.
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Overview” on page 165
“Starting and Ending a CLI Session” on page 168
“Using the CLI Help Facility” on page 169
“About SHELL Commands” on page 170
“SHELL Commands” on page 171
“About CONFIG Commands” on page 187
“CONFIG Commands” on page 191
CONFIG Commands
“Remote ATA Configuration Commands” on page 191
“PPPoE with IPoE Settings” on page 246
“DSL Commands” on page 194
“Ethernet Port Settings” on page 248
“Bridging Settings” on page 196
“802.3ah Ethernet OAM Settings” on page 249
“DHCP Settings” on page 198
“Command Line Inter face Preference Settings” on
page 251
“DMT Settings” on page 207
“Port Renumbering Settings” on page 252
“Domain Name System Settings” on page 208
“Security Settings” on page 253
“IGMP Settings” on page 211
“System Settings” on page 269
163
CONFIG Commands
164
“IP Settings” on page 215
“Syslog” on page 274
“Queue Configuration” on page 231
“Wireless Settings (supported models)” on page 277
“IPMaps Settings” on page 239
“VLAN Settings” on page 288
“Network Address Translation (NAT) Default Settings”
on page 240
“VoIP settings” on page 294
“Network Address Translation (NAT) Pinhole Settings”
on page 240
“UPnP settings” on page 301
“PPPoE /PPPoA Settings” on page 242
“DSL Forum settings” on page 302
“SNMP Settings” on page 265
“Backup IP Gateway Settings” on page 304
Overview
Overview
The CLI has two major command modes: SHELL and CONFIG. Summary tables that list
the commands are provided below. Details of the entire command set follow in this section.
SHELL Commands
Command
arp
atmping
clear
clear_certificate
clear_log
configure
diagnose
download
etheroam
exit
help
install
license
log
loglevel
netstat
nslookup
ping
quit
reset
restart
show
start
status
telnet
traceroute
upload
Status and/or Description
to send ARP request
to send ATM OAM loopback
to erase all stored configuration information
to remove an SSL certificate that has been installed
to erase all stored log info in flash memory
to configure unit's options
to run self-test
to download config file
to show Ethernet OAM info
to quit this shell
to get more: “help all” or “help help”
to download and program an image into flash
to enter an upgrade key to add a feature
to add a message to the diagnostic log
to report or change diagnostic log level
to show IP information
to send DNS query for host
to send ICMP Echo request
to quit this shell
to reset subsystems
to restart unit
to show system information
to start subsystem
to show basic status of unit
to telnet to a remote host
to send traceroute probes
to upload config file
165
view
voip
who
166
to show configuration information
to show VoIP info
to show who is using the shell
Overview
CONFIG Commands
Command Verbs
delete
help
save
script
set
validate
view
Status and/or Description
Delete configuration list data
Help command option
Save configuration data
Print configuration data
Set configuration data
Validate configuration settings
View configuration data
Keywords
ata
atm
backup
bridge
dhcp
dmt
diffserv
dns
dslf-cpewan
dslf-lanmgnt
dynamic-dns
ethernet
ethernet-MAC-override
igmp
ip
ip-maps
nat-default
pinhole
ppp
wan-over-ether
preferences
queue
radius
security
servers
ATA remote config options
ATM options (DSL only)
Backup gateway options
Bridge options
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol options
DMT ADSL options
Differentiated Services options
Domain Name System options
TR-069 CPE WAN management
TR-064 LAN management
Dynamic DNS client options
Ethernet options
Ethernet options
IGMP configuration options
TCP/IP protocol options
IPmaps options
Network Address Translation default options
Pinhole options
Peer-to-Peer Protocol options
PPP over Ethernet options
Shell environment settings
bandwidth queueing options
RADIUS Server options
Security options
Internal Server options
167
snmp
system
upnp
vdsl
vlan
wireless
SNMP management options
Gateway’s system options
UPnP options
VDSL tuning options
VLAN options
Wireless LAN options
Command Utilities
top
quit
exit
Go to top level of configuration mode
Exit from configuration mode; return to shell mode
Exit from configuration mode; return to shell mode
Starting and Ending a CLI Session
Open a telnet connection from a workstation on your network.
You initiate a telnet connection by issuing the following command from an IP host that supports telnet, for example, a personal computer running a telnet application such as NCSA
Telnet.
telnet <ip_address>
You must know the IP address of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway before you can make a
telnet connection to it. By default, your Motorola Netopia® Gateway uses 192.168.0.1 as
the IP address for its LAN interface. You can use a Web browser to configure the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway IP address.
Logging In
The command line interface log-in process emulates the log-in process for a UNIX host. To
logon, enter the username (either admin or user), and your password.
• Entering the administrator password lets you display and update all Motorola Netopia®
Gateway settings.
• Entering a user password lets you display (but not update) Motorola Netopia® Gateway
settings.
When you have logged in successfully, the command line interface lists the username and
the security level associated with the password you entered in the diagnostic log.
168
Using the CLI Help Facility
Ending a CLI Session
You end a command line interface session by typing quit from the SHELL node of the
command line interface hierarchy.
Saving Settings
In CONFIG mode, the save command saves the working copy of the settings to the Gateway. The Gateway automatically validates its settings when you save and displays a warning message if the configuration is not correct.
Using the CLI Help Facility
The help command lets you display on-line help for SHELL and CONFIG commands. To display a list of the commands available to you from your current location within the command
line interface hierarchy, enter help.
To obtain help for a specific CLI command, type help <command>. You can truncate the
help command to h or a question mark when you request help for a CLI command.
169
About SHELL Commands
You begin in SHELL mode when you start a CLI session. SHELL mode lets you perform the
following tasks with your Motorola Netopia® Gateway:
• Monitor its performance
• Display and reset Gateway statistics
• Issue administrative commands to restart Motorola Netopia® Gateway functions
SHELL Prompt
When you are in SHELL mode, the CLI prompt is the name of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway followed by a right angle bracket (>). For example, if you open a CLI connection to the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway named “Netopia-3000/9437188,” you would see Netopia3000/9437188> as your CLI prompt.
SHELL Command Shortcuts
You can truncate most commands in the CLI to their shortest unique string. For example,
you can use the truncated command q in place of the full quit command to exit the CLI.
However, you would need to enter rese for the reset command, since the first characters
of reset are common to the restart command.
The only commands you cannot truncate are restart and clear. To prevent accidental
interruption of communications, you must enter the restart and clear commands in their
entirety.
You can use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll backward and forward through recent
commands you have entered. Alternatively, you can use the !! command to repeat the last
command you entered.
170
SHELL Commands
SHELL Commands
Common Commands
arp nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
Sends an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) request to match the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn IP
address to an Ethernet hardware address.
clear [yes]
Clears the configuration settings in a Motorola Netopia® Gateway. If you do not use the
optional yes qualifier, you are prompted to confirm the clear command.
clear_certificate
Removes an SSL certificate that has been installed.
clear_log
Erases the log information stored in flash if persistent logging is enabled.
configure
Puts the command line interface into Configure mode, which lets you configure your Motorola Netopia® Gateway with Config commands. Config commands are described starting on
page 167.
diagnose
Runs a diagnostic utility to conduct a series of internal checks and loopback tests to verify
network connectivity over each interface on your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. The console
displays the results of each test as the diagnostic utility runs. If one test is dependent on
another, the diagnostic utility indents its entry in the console window. For example, the
diagnostic utility indents the Check IP connect to Ethernet (LAN) entry, since that test will
not run if the Check Ethernet LAN Connect test fails.
171
Each test generates one of the following result codes:
CODE
PASS
FAIL
SKIPPED
PENDING
Description
The test was successful.
The test was unsuccessful.
The test was skipped because a test on which it depended failed, or
because the test did not apply to your particular setup or model.
The test timed out without producing a result. Try running the test again.
download [server_address ] [filename] [confirm]
This command installs a file of configuration parameters into the Motorola Netopia® Gateway from a TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server. The TFTP server must be accessible
on your Ethernet network.
You can include one or more of the following arguments with the download command. If
you omit arguments, the console prompts you for this information.
• The server_address argument identifies the IP address of the TFTP server from
which you want to copy the Motorola Netopia® Gateway configuration file.
• The filename argument identifies the path and name of the configuration file on the
TFTP server.
• If you include the optional confirm keyword, the download begins as soon as all information is entered.
You can also download an SSL certificate file from a trusted Certification Authority (CA), on
platforms that support SSL, as follows:
download [-cert] [server_address ] [filename] [confirm]
install [server_address] [filename] [confirm]
(Not supported on model 3342/3352)
Downloads a new version of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway operating software from a
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server, validates the software image, and programs the
image into the Motorola Netopia® Gateway memory. After you install new operating software, you must restart the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
172
SHELL Commands
The server_address argument identifies the IP address of the TFTP server on which
your Motorola Netopia® Gateway operating software is stored. The filename argument
identifies the path and name of the operating software file on the TFTP server.
If you include the optional keyword confirm, you will not be prompted to confirm whether
or not you want to perform the operation.
license [key]
This command installs a software upgrade key. An upgrade key is a purchased item, based
on the serial number of the gateway.
log message_string
Adds the message in the message_string argument to the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
diagnostic log.
loglevel [level]
Displays or modifies the types of log messages you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
to record. If you enter the loglevel command without the optional level argument,
the command line interface displays the current log level setting.
You can enter the loglevel command with the level argument to specify the types of
diagnostic messages you want to record. All messages with a level number equal to or
greater than the level you specify are recorded. For example, if you specify loglevel 3, the
diagnostic log will retain high-level informational messages (level 3), warnings (level 4),
and failure messages (level 5).
Use the following values for the level argument:
• 1 or low – Low-level informational messages or greater; includes trivial status messages.
• 2 or medium – Medium-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages that can help monitor network traffic.
• 3 or high – High-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages
that may be significant but do not constitute errors.
• 4 or warning – Warnings or greater; includes recoverable error conditions and useful
operator information.
173
• 5 or failure – Failures; includes messages describing error conditions that may
not be recoverable.
netstat -i
Displays the IP interfaces for your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
netstat -r
Displays the IP routes stored in your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
nslookup { hostname | ip_address }
Performs a domain name system lookup for a specified host.
• The hostname argument is the name of the host for which you want DNS information;
for example, nslookup klaatu.
• The ip_address argument is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the device
for which you want DNS information.
ping [-s size] [-c count]{ hostname | ip_address }
Causes the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to issue a series of ICMP Echo requests for the
device with the specified name or IP address.
• The hostname argument is the name of the device you want to ping; for example, ping
ftp.netopia.com.
• The ip_address argument is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the device
you want to locate. If a host using the specified name or IP address is active, it returns
one or more ICMP Echo replies, confirming that it is accessible from your network.
• The -s size argument lets you specify the size of the ICMP packet.
• The -c count argument lets you specify the number of ICMP packets generated for the
ping request. Values greater than 250 are truncated to 250.
You can use the ping command to determine whether a hostname or IP address is
already in use on your network. You cannot use the ping command to ping the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway’s own IP address.
174
SHELL Commands
quit
Exits the Motorola Netopia® Gateway command line interface.
reset arp
Clears the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache on your unit.
reset atm
Resets the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) statistics.
reset cdmode
This command will set up one boot flag so that the next time a 3342N/3352N restarts or
reboots (power cycle), the Gateway will boot into CD-ROM mode instead of Gateway mode.
This command is only for the 3342N/3352N. If the Gateway is not a 3342N/3352N this
command does nothing but returns the message: “CD mode is not supported on this platform.”
reset crash
Clears crash-dump information, which identifies the contents of the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway registers at the point of system malfunction.
reset dhcp server
Clears the DHCP lease table in the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
reset diffserv
Resets the Differentiated Services (diffserv) statistics.
reset enet [ all ]
Resets Ethernet statistics to zero. Resets individual LAN switch port statistics as well as
wireless and WAN Ethernet statistics (where applicable).
175
reset heartbeat
Restarts the heartbeat sequence.
reset ipmap
Clears the IPMap table (NAT).
reset log
Rewinds the diagnostic log display to the top of the existing Motorola Netopia® Gateway
diagnostic log. The reset log command does not clear the diagnostic log. The next show
log command will display information from the beginning of the log file.
reset security-log
Clears the security monitoring log to make room to capture new entries.
reset wan-users [all | ip-address]
This function disconnects the specified WAN User to allow for other users to access the
WAN. This function is only available if the number of WAN Users is restricted and NAT is on.
Use the all parameter to disconnect all users. If you logon as Admin you can disconnect
any or all users. If you logon as User, you can only disconnect yourself.
reset wan
This function resets WAN interface statistics.
reset wepkeys
This function allows you to force your wireless WEP key settings back to the default values,
if there are default values. For example, on some models, the WEP keys are based on the
serial number. This allows you to get back those default settings if you have changed them
without the need to reset the entire configuration of the unit.
176
SHELL Commands
restart [seconds]
Restarts your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. If you include the optional seconds argument,
your Motorola Netopia® Gateway will restart when the specified number of seconds have
elapsed. You must enter the complete restart command to initiate a restart.
show all-info
Displays all settings currently configured in the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show backup
Displays the status of the Backup port, Up or Down, and reports the current port in use.
show bridge interfaces
Displays bridge interfaces maintained by the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show bridge table
Displays the bridging table maintained by the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show config
Dumps the Motorola Netopia® Gateway’s configuration script just as the script command does in config mode.
show crash
Displays the most recent crash information, if any, for your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show dhcp agent
Displays DHCP relay-agent leases.
show dhcp server leases
Displays the DHCP leases stored in RAM by your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
177
show diffserv
Displays the Differentiated Services and QoS values configured in the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway.
show dslf device-association
Displays LAN devices that conform with the TR111 Gateway requirement. It displays - IP
Address, Manufacture OUI and Serial number.
show enet [ all ]
Displays Ethernet interface statistics maintained by the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7, supports display of individual LAN switch port statistics as well as WAN Ethernet statistics (where applicable).
Example:
show enet status all
10/100 Ethernet 1
Port Status: Link down
Transmit OK
:
Transmit unicastpkts :
Receive OK
:
Receive unicastpkts
:
Tx Octets
:
Rx Octets
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
10/100 Ethernet 2
Port Status: Link down
Transmit OK
:
Transmit unicastpkts :
Receive OK
:
Receive unicastpkts
:
Tx Octets
:
Rx Octets
:
10/100 Ethernet 3
178
0
0
0
0
0
0
SHELL Commands
Port Status: Link up
Duplex: Full-duplex not
Speed: 100BASE-X
Transmit OK
:
Transmit unicastpkts :
Receive OK
:
Receive unicastpkts
:
Tx Octets
:
Rx Octets
:
active
3309
31
5588
1976
31
1976
10/100 Ethernet 4
Port Status: Link down
Transmit OK
:
Transmit unicastpkts :
Receive OK
:
Receive unicastpkts
:
Tx Octets
:
Rx Octets
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
show etheroam ah
Displays OAM internal information, such as OAM mode, state, configurations, events and
OAM statistics.
show features
Displays standard and keyed features installed in the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show group-mgmt
Displays the IGMP Snooping Table.
show ip arp
Displays the Ethernet address resolution table stored in your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
179
show ip igmp
Displays the contents of the IGMP Group Address table and the IGMP Report table maintained by your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show ip interfaces
Displays the IP interfaces for your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show ip ipsec
Displays IPSec Tunnel statistics.
show ip firewall
Displays firewall statistics.
show ip lan-discovery
Displays the LAN Host Discovery Table of hosts on the wired or wireless LAN, and whether
or not they are currently online.
show ip routes
Displays the IP routes stored in your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
show ip state-insp
Displays whether stateful inspection is enabled on an interface or not, exposed addresses
and blocked packet statistics because of stateful inspection.
show ipmap
Displays IPMap table (NAT).
180
SHELL Commands
show log
Displays blocks of information from the Motorola Netopia® Gateway diagnostic log. To see
the entire log, you can repeat the show log command or you can enter show log
all.
show memory [all]
Displays memory usage information for your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. If you include
the optional all argument, your Motorola Netopia® Gateway will display a more detailed
set of memory statistics.
show pppoe
Displays status information for each PPPoE socket, such as the socket state, service
names, and host ID values.
show rtsp
Displays RTSP ALG session activity data.
show security-log
Displays blocks of information from the Motorola Netopia® Gateway security log.
show status
Displays the current status of a Motorola Netopia® Gateway, the device's hardware and
software revision levels, a summary of errors encountered, and the length of time the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway has been running since it was last restarted. Identical to the
status command.
show summary
Displays a summary of WAN, LAN, and Gateway information.
181
show vlan
Displays detail of VLAN status and statistics.
Example:
show vlan
Displaying vlan segment interfaces
==== vlan mode ====
==== segment 0 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 1 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00001006-00000001
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00001006-00000001
==== segment 2 port masks ====
PortPort
: 0000003c-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 0000003c-00000000
==== segment 3 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 4 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 5 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 6 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 7 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
182
SHELL Commands
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 8 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 9 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== segment 10 port masks ====
PortPort
: 00000000-00000000
GlobalPort : 00000000-00000000
SumPort
: 00000000-00000000
==== vlan active segment ====
Type : 1
Index : 1
Vid : 1
PortMask
: 00001006-00000001
SwitchMask
: 00000004
WirelessMask : 00001000
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: eth-lan-uplink
portType : 1
portIndex : 1
ifId
: 45
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: ethernet0/0
portType : 3
portIndex : 2
ifId
: 46
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: ssid1
portType : 5
portIndex : 12
ifId
: 56
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: eth-ip0
portType : 7
portIndex : 32
ifId
: 76
==== vlan active segment ====
183
Type : 1
Index : 2
Vid : 3
PortMask
: 0000003c-00000000
SwitchMask
: 0000003c
WirelessMask : 00000000
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: ethernet0/0
portType : 3
portIndex : 2
ifId
: 90
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: ethernet0/1
portType : 3
portIndex : 3
ifId
: 91
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: ethernet0/2
portType : 3
portIndex : 4
ifId
: 92
==== vlan active link ====
namePtr
: ethernet0/3
portType : 3
portIndex : 5
ifId
: 93
show wireless [all]
Shows wireless status and statistics.
show wireless clients [ MAC_address ]
Displays details on connected clients, or more details on a particular client if the MAC
address is added as an argument.
telnet { hostname | ip_address } [port]
Lets you open a telnet connection to the specified host through your Motorola Netopia®
Gateway.
184
SHELL Commands
• The hostname argument is the name of the device to which you want to connect; for
example, telnet ftp.netopia.com.
• The ip_address argument is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the device
to which you want to connect.
• The port argument is the number of t he port over which you want to open a telnet
session.
traceroute ( ip_address | hostname )
Traces the routing path to an IP destination.
upload [server_address] [filename] [confirm]
Copies the current configuration settings of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to a TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server. The TFTP server must be accessible on your Ethernet network. The server_address argument identifies the IP address of the TFTP server on
which you want to store the Motorola Netopia® Gateway settings. The filename argument identifies the path and name of the configuration file on the TFTP server. If you
include the optional confirm keyword, you will not be prompted to confirm whether or not
you want to perform the operation.
view config
Dumps the Motorola Netopia® Gateway’s configuration just as the view command does
in config mode.
who
Displays the names of the current shell and PPP users.
WAN Commands
atmping vccn [ segment | end-to-end ]
Lets you check the ATM connection reachability and network connectivity. This command
sends five Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) loopback calls to the specified vpi/vci destination. There is a five second total timeout interval.
185
Use the segment argument to ping a neighbor switch.
Use the end-to-end argument to ping a remote end node.
reset dhcp client release [ vcc-id ]
Releases the DHCP lease the Motorola Netopia® Gateway is currently using to acquire the
IP settings for the specified DSL port. The vcc-id identifier is an “index” letter in the
range B-I, and does not directly map to the VCC in use. Enter the reset dhcp client
release command without the variable to see the letter assigned to each virtual circuit.
reset dhcp client renew [ vcc-id ]
Releases the DHCP lease the Motorola Netopia® Gateway is currently using to acquire the
IP settings for the specified DSL port. The vcc-id identifier is an “index” letter in the
range B-I, and does not directly map to the VCC in use. Enter the reset dhcp client
release without the variable to see the letter assigned to each virtual circuit.
reset dsl
Resets any open DSL connection.
reset ppp vccn
Resets the point-to-point connection over the specified virtual circuit. This command only
applies to virtual circuits that use PPP framing.
show atm [all]
Displays ATM statistics for the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. The optional all argument
displays a more detailed set of ATM statistics.
show dsl [ all ]
Displays DSL port statistics, such as upstream and downstream connection rates and
noise levels.
186
About CONFIG Commands
show ppp [{ stats | lcp | ipcp }]
Displays information about open PPP links. You can display a subset of the PPP statistics
by including an optional stats, lcp, or ipcp argument for the show ppp command.
start ppp vccn
Opens a PPP link on the specified virtual circuit.
About CONFIG Commands
You reach the configuration mode of the command line interface by typing configure (or
any truncation of configure, such as con or config) at the CLI SHELL prompt.
CONFIG Mode Prompt
When you are in CONFIG mode, the CLI prompt consists of the name of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway followed by your current node in the hierarchy and two right angle brackets
(>>). For example, when you enter CONFIG mode (by typing config at the SHELL prompt),
the Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> prompt reminds you that you are at the top
of the CONFIG hierarchy. If you move to the ip node in the CONFIG hierarchy (by typing ip
at the CONFIG prompt), the prompt changes to Netopia-3000/9437188 (ip)>> to
identify your current location.
Some CLI commands are not available until certain conditions are met. For example, you
must enable IP for an interface before you can enter IP settings for that interface.
Navigating the CONFIG Hierarchy
• Moving from CONFIG to SHELL — You can navigate from anywhere in the CONFIG
hierarchy back to the SHELL level by entering quit at the CONFIG prompt and pressing
RETURN.
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> quit
Netopia-3000/9437188 >
• Moving from top to a subnode — You can navigate from the top node to a subnode
by entering the node name (or the significant letters of the node name) at the CONFIG
187
prompt and pressing RETURN. For example, you move to the IP subnode by entering ip
and pressing RETURN.
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> ip
Netopia-3000/9437188 (ip)>>
As a shortcut, you can enter the significant letters of the node name in place of the full
node name at the CONFIG prompt. The significant characters of a node name are the letters that uniquely identify the node. For example, since no other CONFIG node starts with
b, you could enter one letter (“b”) to move to the bridge node.
• Jumping down several nodes at once — You can jump down several levels in the
CONFIG hierarchy by entering the complete path to a node.
• Moving up one node — You can move up through the CONFIG hierarchy one node at a
time by entering the up command.
• Jumping to the top node — You can jump to the top level from anywhere in the CONFIG hierarchy by entering the top command.
• Moving from one subnode to another — You can move from one subnode to another
by entering a partial path that identifies how far back to climb.
• Moving from any subnode to any other subnode — You can move from any subnode
to any other subnode by entering a partial path that starts with a top-level CONFIG command.
• Scrolling backward and forward through recent commands — You can use the Up
and Down arrow keys to scroll backward and forward through recent commands you
have entered. When the command you want appears, press Enter to execute it.
Entering Commands in CONFIG Mode
CONFIG commands consist of keywords and arguments. Keywords in a CONFIG command
specify the action you want to take or the entity on which you want to act. Arguments in a
CONFIG command specify the values appropriate to your site. For example, the CONFIG
command
set ip ethernet A ip_address
consists of two keywords (ip, and ethernet A) and one argument (ip_address).
When you use the command to configure your Gateway, you would replace the argument
with a value appropriate to your site.
For example:
188
About CONFIG Commands
set ip ethernet A 192.31.222.57
Guidelines: CONFIG Commands
The following table provides guidelines for entering and formatting CONFIG commands.
Command
component
Command verbs
Keywords
Argument Text
Numbers
IP addresses
Rules for entering CONFIG commands
CONFIG commands must start with a command verb (set, view, delete).
You can truncate CONFIG verbs to three characters (set, vie, del).
CONFIG verbs are case-insensitive. You can enter “SET,” “Set,” or “set.”
Keywords are case-insensitive. You can enter “Ethernet,” “ETHERNET,” or
“ethernet” as a keyword without changing its meaning.
Keywords can be abbreviated to the length that they are differentiated from
other keywords.
Text strings can be as many as 64 characters long, unless otherwise specified. In some cases they may be as long as 255 bytes.
Special characters are represented using backslash notation.
Text strings may be enclosed in double (“) or single (‘) quote marks. If the
text string includes an embedded space, it must be enclosed in quotes.
Special characters are represented using backslash notation.
Enter numbers as integers, or in hexadecimal, where so noted.
Enter IP addresses in dotted decimal notation (0 to 255).
If a command is ambiguous or miskeyed, the CLI prompts you to enter additional information. For example, you must specify which virtual circuit you are configuring when you are
setting up a Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
Displaying Current Gateway Settings
You can use the view command to display the current CONFIG settings for your Motorola
Netopia® Gateway. If you enter the view command at the top level of the CONFIG hierarchy, the CLI displays the settings for all enabled functions. If you enter the view command
at an intermediate node, you see settings for that node and its subnodes.
Step Mode: A CLI Configuration Technique
The Motorola Netopia® Gateway command line interface includes a step mode to automate the process of entering configuration settings. When you use the CONFIG step mode,
the command line interface prompts you for all required and optional information. You can
189
then enter the configuration values appropriate for your site without having to enter complete CLI commands.
When you are in step mode, the command line interface prompts you to enter required and
optional settings. If a setting has a default value or a current setting, the command line
interface displays the default value for the command in parentheses. If a command has a
limited number of acceptable values, those values are presented in brackets, with each
value separated by a vertical line. For example, the following CLI step command indicates
that the default value is off and that valid entries are limited to on and off.
option (off) [on | off]:
on
You can accept the default value for a field by pressing the Return key. To use a different
value, enter it and press Return.
You can enter the CONFIG step mode by entering set from the top node of the CONFIG hierarchy. You can enter step mode for a particular service by entering set service_name.
In stepping set mode (press Control-X <Return/Enter> to exit. For example:
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> set system
...
system
name (“Netopia-3000/9437188”): Mycroft
Diagnostic Level (High): medium
Stepping mode ended.
Validating Your Configuration
You can use the validate CONFIG command to make sure that your configuration settings have been entered correctly. If you use the validate command, the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway verifies that all required settings for all services are present and that
settings are consistent.
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> validate
Error: Subnet mask is incorrect
Global Validation did not pass inspection!
You can use the validate command to verify your configuration settings at any time.
Your Motorola Netopia® Gateway automatically validates your configuration any time you
save a modified configuration.
190
CONFIG Commands
CONFIG Commands
This section describes the keywords and arguments for the various CONFIG commands.
Remote ATA Configuration Commands
Motorola Netopia® firmware supports configuration of a maximum of four Motorola Netopia® ATA profiles, which are stored in the Gateway’s configuration database. When a
Motorola Netopia® ATA is discovered, the Gateway compares the MAC address of the ATA
with one of the existing profiles stored in the database. If there is a match, the configuration is downloaded to the Motorola Netopia® ATA, and the ATA is restarted. Once the
Motorola Netopia® ATA is restarted, it comes up with the newly downloaded configuration.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-option [ on | off ]
Enables or disables the remote ATA configuration option for the specified ATA configuration
profile to be stored in the Gateway.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-mac-addr MAC_addr
Specifies the MAC address of the ATA for the specified configuration profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-qos-enable [ on | off ]
Enables or disables QoS for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-enable [ on | off ]
Enables or disables DHCP client service for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-hostname string
Specifies a DHCP client hostname for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-vid-enable [ off | on ]
Enables or disables a DHCP client vendor ID for the specified profile.
191
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-dhcpc-vid string
Specifies a vendor ID for the specified profile when ata-dhcpc-vid-enable is on.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-static-wan-ip ip_addr
Specifies a static WAN IP address for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-static-wan-subnet-mask subnet_mask
Specifies a static WAN IP subnet mask for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-static-wan-gateway ip_addr
Specifies a static gateway WAN IP address for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-proxy-server ip_addr
Specifies a SIP proxy server hostname or IP address for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-proxy-port port
Specifies a SIP proxy server port, typically 5060, for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-registrar-server ip_addr
Specifies a registrar server hostname or IP address for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-registrar-port port
Specifies a registrar server port, typically 5060, for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-outproxy-server ip_addr
Specifies an outbound proxy server hostname or IP address for the specified profile.
192
CONFIG Commands
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-outproxy-port port
Specifies an outbound proxy server port, typically 5060, for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-auth-id value
Specifies an authorization ID for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-user-name string
Specifies the ISP-supplied user name for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-user-display-name string
Specifies the a user “display” or “screen” name for the specified profile.
set ata profile [ 0... 3 ] ata-user-password string
Specifies the user password for the specified profile.
193
DSL Commands
ATM Settings. You can use the CLI to set up each ATM virtual circuit.
set atm option {on | off }
Enables the WAN interface of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to be configured using the
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) protocol.
set atm [vcc n] option {on | off }
Selects the virtual circuit for which further parameters are set. Up to eight VCCs are supported; the maximum number is dependent on your Motorola Netopia® Operating System
tier and the capabilities that your Service Provider offers.
set atm [vcc n] qos service-class { cbr | ubr | vbr }
Sets the Quality of Service class for the specified virtual circuit – Constant (cbr), Unspecified (ubr), or Variable (vbr) Bit Rate.
• ubr: No configuration is needed for UBR VCs. Leave the default value 0 (maximum line
rate).
• cbr: One parameter is required for CBR VCs. Enter the Peak Cell Rate that applies to
the VC. This value should be between 1 and the line rate. You set this value according
to specifications defined by your service provider.
• vbr: Three parameters are required for VBR VCs. Enter the Peak Cell Rate, the Sustained Cell Rate, and the Maximum Burst Size that apply to the VC. You set these
values according to specifications defined by your service provider.
set atm [vcc n] qos peak-cell-rate { 1 ...n }
If QoS class is set to cbr or vbr then specify the peak-cell-rate that should apply to the
specified virtual circuit. This value should be between 1 and the line rate.
The Peak Cell Rate (PCR) should be set to the maximum rate a PVC can oversubscribe its
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR). The Peak Cell Rate (see below) must be less than, or equal to
the raw WAN (DSL) bit rate. The Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the number of cells that can
be sent at the PCR rate, after which the PVC must fall back to the SCR rate.
194
CONFIG Commands
set atm [vcc n] qos sustained-cell-rate { 1 ...n }
If QoS class is set to vbr, then specify the sustained-cell-rate that should apply to the
specified virtual circuit. This value should be less than, or equal to the Peak Cell Rate,
which should be less than, or equal to the line rate.
set atm [vcc n] qos max-burst-size { 1 ...n }
If QoS class is set to vbr then specify the max-burst-size that should apply to the specified virtual circuit. This value is the maximum number of cells that can be transmitted at
the Peak Cell Rate after which the ATM VC transmission rate must drop to the Sustained
Cell Rate.
set atm [vcc n] vpi { 0 ... 255 }
Select the virtual path identifier (vpi) for VCC n.
Your Service Provider will indicate the required vpi number.
set atm [vcc n] vci { 0 ... 65535 }
Select the virtual channel identifier (vci) for VCC n. Your Service Provider will indicate the
required vci number.
set atm [vccn] encap { ppp-vcmux | ppp-llc | ether-llc |
ip-llc | ppoe-vcmux | pppoe-llc }
Select the encapsulation mode for VCC n. The options are:
ppp-vcmux
PPP over ATM, VC-muxed
ppp-llc
PPP over ATM, LLC-SNAP
ether-llc
RFC-1483, bridged Ethernet, LLC-SNAP
ip-llc
RFC-1483, routed IP, LLC-SNAP
pppoe-vcmux
PPP over Ethernet, VC-muxed
pppoe-llc
PPP over Ethernet, LLC-SNAP
Your Service Provider will indicate the required encapsulation mode.
195
set atm [vccn] pppoe-sessions { 1 ... 8 }
Select the number of PPPoE sessions to be configured for VCC 1, up to a total of eight. The
total number of pppoe-sessions and PPPoE VCCs configured must be less than or equal
to eight.
Bridging Settings
Bridging lets the Motorola Netopia® Gateway use MAC (Ethernet hardware) addresses to
forward non-TCP/IP traffic from one network to another. When bridging is enabled, the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway maintains a table of up to 512 MAC addresses. Entries that
are not used within 30 seconds are dropped. If the bridging table fills up, the oldest table
entries are dropped to make room for new entries.
Virtual circuits that use IP framing cannot be bridged.
☛
NOTE:
For bridging in the 3341 (or any model with a USB port), you cannot set the
bridge option off, or bridge ethernet option off; these are on by default
because of the USB port.
Common Commands
set bridge sys-bridge {on | off }
Enables or disables bridging services in the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. You must enable
bridging services within the Motorola Netopia® Gateway before you can enable bridging for
a specific interface.
set bridge concurrent-bridging-routing {on | off }
Enables or disables Concurrent Bridging/Routing.
set bridge dhcp-filterset "string"
Assigns a filterset named string to the bridge configuration.
196
CONFIG Commands
☛
NOTE:
A filterset can only be configured for the bridge if the system bridge or concurrent bridging/routing is enabled.
set bridge ethernet option { on | off }
Enables or disables bridging services for the specified virtual circuit using Ethernet framing.
set bridge dsl vccn option { on | off }
Enables or disables bridging services for the specified interface. Specified interface must
be part of a VLAN if bridge is turned on. Only RFC-1483 Bridged encapsulation is supported currently.
• show log command will show that WAN Bridge is enabled when at least one WAN interface is bridged.
• show ip interfaces and show bridge interfaces commands will show the interfaces
that are not in bridged mode and that are in bridged modes, respectively.
set bridge table-timeout [ 30 ... 6000 ]
Sets the timeout value for bridging table timeout. Default = 30 secs; range = 30 secs –
6000 secs (.5–100 mins).
197
DHCP Settings
As a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server, your Motorola Netopia® Gateway can
assign IP addresses and provide configuration information to other devices on your network dynamically. A device that acquires its IP address and other TCP/IP configuration settings from the Motorola Netopia® Gateway can use the information for a fixed period of
time (called the DHCP lease).
Common Commands
set dhcp option { off | server | relay-agent }
Enables or disables DHCP services in the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. You must enable
DHCP services before you can enter other DHCP settings for the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
If you turn off DHCP services and save the new configuration, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway clears its DHCP settings.
set dhcp start-address ip_address
If you selected server, specifies the first address in the DHCP address range. The
Motorola Netopia® Gateway can reserve a sequence of up to 253 IP addresses within a
subnet, beginning with the specified address for dynamic assignment.
set dhcp end-address ip_address
If you selected server, specifies the last address in the DHCP address range.
set dhcp lease-time lease-time
If you selected server, specifies the default length for DHCP leases issued by the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Enter lease time in dd:hh:mm:ss (day/hour/minute/second)
format.
set dhcp option-group name
Specifies a name for one of up to eight DHCP Option Groups. Each Option Group can have
a name of between 1 and 15 characters. The name is used in the DHCP filterset syntax to
198
CONFIG Commands
choose what group of gen-options is to be served to a particular DHCP Client. See “DHCP
Generic Options” on page 200 and “DHCP Option Filtering” on page 204.
Option Groups refer to gen-options; they do not contain them. Deleting a gen-option from
an option group does not delete the option. Adding a gen-option to an option-group does
not preclude it from being added to another option-group.
set dhcp default-option-group name
Sets the option group specified by name as the default.
set dhcp server-address ip_address
If you selected relay-agent, specifies the IP address of the relay agent server.
set dhcp range [ 2... 8 ] start-address ip_address
Specifies the starting IP address of DHCP range n when subnet n option is on. See “Additional subnets” on page 220.
set dhcp range [ 2... 8 ] end-address ip_address
Specifies the ending IP address of DHCP range n when subnet n option is on. See “Additional subnets” on page 220.
set dhcp reserved ip-address x.x.x.x mac-address y-y-y-y-y-y
If you selected server, reserves the specified IP address from the DHCP pool to the
specified MAC address. These are list items; a total of 16 reserved addresses are supported. Secondary ranges will all make use of the dhcp lease-time value.
199
DHCP Generic Options
You can specify DHCP Generic Options which allow you to configure the content to be
served for particular option numbers.
set dhcp gen-option name name
Specifies a DHCP generic option set named name of one to 15 characters. You can specify
up to 20 gen-options. Each can contain up to 100 bytes of data, up to a maximum of 912
bytes of options data total. An option will be served only if the client requests it.
set dhcp gen-option option [ 1 – 255 ]
Specifies the DHCP option by number, 1 – 255. The following table shows the formats and
sizes for known options, and whether or not you can configure a gen-option of that type.
200
Option
Data Format
Data Size
(bytes)
Can
Configure
0
Empty
0
No
1
IP mask
4
Yes
2
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
Yes
3 - 11
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
12
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
13
Unsigned 2 byte integer
2
Yes
14 - 15
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
16
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
Yes
17
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
18
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
19 - 20
Flag
1
Yes
21
IP address & mask list
Multiples of 8
Yes
22
Unsigned 2 byte integer
2
Yes
23
Unsigned 1 byte integer
1
Yes
24
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
Yes
25
Unsigned 2 byte integer list
Multiples of 2
Yes
26
Unsigned 2 byte integer
2
Yes
27
Flag
1
Yes
CONFIG Commands
Option
Data Format
Data Size
(bytes)
Can
Configure
28
IP address
4
Yes
29 - 31
Flag
1
Yes
32
IP address
4
Yes
33
IP address and mask list
Multiples of 8
Yes
34
Flag
1
Yes
35
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
Yes
36
Flag
1
Yes
37
Unsigned 1 byte integer
1
Yes
38
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
Yes
39
Flag
1
Yes
40
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
41 - 42
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
43
Vendor-specific
String
Yes
44 - 45
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
46
Unsigned 1 byte integer
1
Yes
47
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
48 - 49
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
50
IP address
4
No
51
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
No
52
Unsigned 1 byte integer
1
No
53
Unsigned 1 byte integer
1
Yes
54
IP address
4
Yes
55
String (up to 100 characters)
N
No
56
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
57
Unsigned 2 byte integer
2
Yes
58 - 59
Unsigned 4 byte integer
4
No
60
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
61
String (up to 100 characters)
N
No
62
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
63
Complex
N
No
201
202
Option
Data Format
Data Size
(bytes)
Can
Configure
64
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
65
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
66 - 67
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
68 - 76
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
77
Pascal string list (length byte + data)
N
Yes
78 - 79
Complex
N
No
80
Empty
0
No
81
Complex
N
No
82
Sub-option list
N
Yes
83
Complex
N
No
84
Undefined
??
Yes
85
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
86 - 87
Unicode String
Multiples of 2
Yes
88
Encoded DN list
N
Yes
89
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
90
Complex
N
No
91 - 97
Undefined/Weakly defined
??
Yes
98
String (up to 100 characters)
N
Yes
99 - 115
Undefined/Weakly defined
??
Yes
116
Flag
1
Yes
117
Unsigned 2 byte integer list
Multiples of 2
Yes
118
IP address
4
Yes
119
Encoded DN list 2
N
Yes
120
Encoded DN list or IP Address list
N
Yes
121 - 125
Complex
N
No
126 - 127
Undefined
N
Yes
128
IP address list
Multiples of 4
Yes
129 - 223
Undefined/Weakly defined
??
Yes
224 - 254
Private Use
N
Yes
CONFIG Commands
Option
Data Format
Data Size
(bytes)
Can
Configure
249 (note)
Microsoft uses this instead of 121
N
Yes
255
Empty
0
No
set dhcp gen-option data-type [ ascii | hex | dotted-decimal ]
Specifies the DHCP gen-option data type: ascii, hex or dotted-decimal.
set dhcp gen-option data data
Specifies the gen-option data.
• If the data-type is ascii, then any printable character + octal representations
(e.g.”\0007”) and hex representations (e.g. “\xA4”).
• If the data-type is hex, then an even number of hex characters (e.g.
“0123456789AbcdEf”
• If the data-type is dotted-decimal, then a series of numbers between 0 and 255, separated by a period (.). IP addresses are generally represented in this form.
203
DHCP Option Filtering
Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7, support for DHCP option filtering is provided via the
filterset settings.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n type [ dhcp-option |
hw-address | requested-option ]
Specifies a DHCP filterset named string as one of three possible types:
The rule can either specify an option and option contents, dhcp-option; a client hardware
address range, hw-address; or an option the client is requesting, requested-option. For
hw-address, you will need to enter start-address and end-address values; for the others
a dhcp-option parameter must be set.
By default a rule is of type dhcp-option, for backwards compatibility.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n dhcp-option [ 0... 255 ]
Creates a DHCP filterset named string, for example “settopbox,” with rule number n.
Up to two filtersets can be added. Your Gateway supports a single LAN DHCP server
instance, but an additional filterset is available for use when bridging, to block undesired
DHCP traffic. Up to 8 rules can be created in the filterset, which are evaluated in order.
dhcp-option determines which DHCP option should be compared. A typical value would be
to use option 60 data for comparison, but allowing this value to be configured permits
more flexibility.
set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 type dhcp-option
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n match-action
[ pass | discard | continue ]
Assigns a match action to the filterset. If set to pass the match-pool address is shown.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n absent-action
204
CONFIG Commands
[ pass | discard | continue ]
Assigns an absent action to the filterset. If set to pass the absent-pool address is hidden.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n match-option-group
"option_group*"
Assigns the option group named option_group to match.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n match-str "match_string*"
Assigns a match string to the filterset. The match-str string will be compared against the
DHCP DISCOVER option data. This string can contain multiple “*” and “?” wildcard substitutions.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n match-pool ip_address
Specifies the start IP address of the range within a DHCP pool where that range will be
used to allocate an address if the wildcard matches.
The value 0.0.0.0 means regular processing; 255.255.255.255 means discard.
set dhcp filterset name "string" rule n absent-pool ip_address
Specifies the start IP address of the range within a DHCP pool where that range will be
used to allocate an address if the option in the DHCP packet is not present.
The value 0.0.0.0 means regular processing; 255.255.255.255 means discard.
Example
Netopia-3000/9450000 (dhcp)>> sc
set dhcp option server
set dhcp start-address 192.168.1.33
set dhcp end-address 192.168.1.63
set dhcp lease-time 01:00:00:00
set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 dhcp-option 60
set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 match-str "STB*"
set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 match-pool
205
192.168.6.100
set dhcp filterset name "settopbox" rule 1 absent-pool
0.0.0.0
Netopia-3000/9450000 (dhcp)>>
set dhcp assigned-filterset "string"
Assigns the filterset named string created above to the DHCP configuration.
206
CONFIG Commands
DMT Settings
DSL Commands
set dmt dsl-annex-support [ off | on ]
This controls whether other annex support (just as Annex M) is enabled. Default is off.
set dmt type [ lite | dmt | ansi | multi | adsl2 | adsl2+ | readsl2 |
adsl2anxm | adsl2+anxm ]
Selects the type of Discrete Multitone (DMT) asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL)
protocol to use for the WAN interface.
The type value also supports the following settings on certain model units: adsl2, adsl2+,
readsl2, adsl2anxm, adsl2+anxm.
☛
NOTE:
Some dmt type settings are now supported for many Annex B (335xN) platforms. 2200 Series and 33xxN Series models are supported. Currently,
adsl2anxm and adsl2+anxm are not supported in Annex B.
set dmt autoConfig [ off | on ]
Enables support for automatic VPI/VCI detection and configuration. When set to on (the
default), a pre-defined list of VPI/VCI pairs are searched to find a valid configuration for
your ADSL line. Entering a value for the VPI or VCI setting will disable this feature.
set dmt dmt dying-gasp [ default | off | on ]
Enables or disables Gateway “dying gasp” behavior in cases of power failure. Default is
off.
set dmt wiringMode [ auto | tip_ring | A_A1 ]
(not supported on all models) This command configures the wiring mode setting for your
ADSL line. Selecting auto (the default) causes the Gateway to detect which pair of wires
207
(inner or outer pair) are in use on your phone line. Specifying tip_ring forces the inner pair
to be used; and A_A1 the outer pair.
set dmt metallic-termination [ auto | disabled | always_on ]
(not supported on all models) This command allows you to apply a sealing current to “dry”
DSL lines so that the wiring doesn’t corrode.
• auto - The device will scan for standard telephone service (POTS). If it finds POTS, it disables metallic termination. If it does not find POTS during the search period, then metallic termination is enabled.
• disabled - There is no POTS detection, and metallic termination is disabled.
• always_on - The device will scan for POTS for information only. Metallic termination is
always enabled.
Domain Name System Settings
Domain Name System (DNS) is an information service for TCP/IP networks that uses a
hierarchical naming system to identify network domains and the hosts associated with
them. You can identify a primary DNS server and one secondary server.
Common Commands
set dns domain-name domain-name
Specifies the default domain name for your network. When an application needs to resolve
a host name, it appends the default domain name to the host name and asks the DNS
server if it has an address for the “fully qualified host name.”
set dns primary-address ip_address
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS name server.
set dns proxy-enable
This allows you to disable the default behavior of acting as a DNS proxy. The default is on.
208
CONFIG Commands
set dns secondary-address ip_address
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS name server. Enter 0.0.0.0 if your network
does not have a secondary DNS name server.
set dns configured-dns-priority [ 0 - 255 ]
Sets the configured DNS priority relative to acquired DNS. These server addresses may be
acquired via DHCP (client), PPP, or statically configured. A “DNS learned-server-priority” is
assigned to each configured interface. By default, configured DNSes have the highest priority (lowest number), then PPP-acquired DNSes, and DHCP-acquired DNSes have lowest priority (highest number).
The default priorities for each type are:
• Configured DNSes: 10
• PPP-acquired: 20
• DHCP-acquired: 30
209
Dynamic DNS Settings
Dynamic DNS support allows you to use the free services of www.dyndns.org. Dynamic
DNS automatically directs any public Internet request for your computer's name to your current dynamically-assigned IP address. This allows you to get to the IP address assigned to
your Gateway, even though your actual IP address may change as a result of a PPPoE connection to the Internet.
set dynamic-dns option [ off | dyndns.org ]
set dynamic-dns ddns-host-name myhostname.dyndns.org
set dynamic-dns ddns-user-name myusername
set dynamic-dns ddns-user-password myuserpassword
Enables or disables dynamic DNS services. The default is off. If you specify dyndns.org,
you must supply your hostname, username for the service, and password.
Because different dynamic DNS vendors use different proprietary protocols, currently only
www.dyndns.org is supported.
210
CONFIG Commands
IGMP Settings
Multicasting is a method for transmitting large amounts of information to many, but not
all, computers over an internet. One common use is to distribute real time voice, video,
and data services to the set of computers which have joined a distributed conference.
Other uses include updating the address books of mobile computer users in the field, or
sending out company newsletters to a distribution list.
Since a router should not be used as a passive forwarding device, Motorola Netopia®
Gateways use a protocol for forwarding multicasting: Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP).
Motorola Netopia® Gateways support IGMP Version 1, Version 2, or, beginning with Motorola Netopia® Firmware Version 7.7, Version 3.
IGMP “Snooping” is a feature of Ethernet layer 2 switches that “listens in” on the IGMP
conversation between computers and multicast routers. Through this process, it builds a
database of where the multicast routers reside by noting IGMP general queries used in the
querier selection process and by listening to other router protocols.
From the host point of view, the snooping function listens at a port level for an IGMP
report. The switch then processes the IGMP report and starts forwarding the relevant multicast stream onto the host's port. When the switch receives an IGMP leave message, it
processes the leave message, and if appropriate stops the multicast stream to that particular port. Basically, customer IGMP messages although processed by the switch are also
sent to the multicast routers.
In order for IGMP snooping to function with IGMP Version 3, it must always track the full
source filter state of each host on each group, as was previously done with Version 2 only
when Fast Leave support was enabled.
IGMP Version 3 supports:
IGMP Source Filtering: the ability for group memberships to incorporate source address filtering. This allows “Source-Specific Multicast” (SSM). By adding source filtering, a Gateway
that proxies IGMP can more selectively join the specific multicast group for which there are
interested LAN multicast receivers.
These features require no user configuration on the Gateway.
You can set the following options:
211
• IGMP Snooping – enables the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to “listen in” to IGMP traf-
•
•
•
•
•
fic. The Gateway discovers multicast group membership for the purpose of restricting
multicast transmissions to only those ports which have requested them. This helps to
reduce overall network traffic from streaming media and other bandwidth-intensive IP
multicast applications.
Robustness – a way of indicating how sensitive to lost packets the network is. IGMP
can recover from robustness minus 1 lost IGMP packet. The default value is 2.
Query Interval– the amount of time in seconds between IGMP General Query messages sent by the querier gateway. The default query interval is 125 seconds.
Query Response Interval – the maximum amount of time in tenths of a second that
the IGMP router waits to receive a response to a General Query message. The default
query response interval is 10 seconds and must be less than the query interval.
Unsolicited Report Interval – the amount of time in seconds between repetitions of a
particular computer’s initial report of membership in a group. The default unsolicited
report interval is 10 seconds.
Querier Version – select a version of the IGMP Querier: version 1, version 2, or version
3. If you know you will be communicating with other hosts that are limited to v1 or v2,
for backward compatibility, select accordingly; otherwise, allow the default v3.
☛
NOTE:
IGMP Querier version is relevant only if the router is configured for IGMP forwarding. If any IGMP v1 routers are present on the subnet, the querier must
use IGMP v1. The use of IGMP v1 must be administratively configured, since
there is no reliable way of dynamically determining whether IGMP v1 routers
are present on a network. IGMP forwarding is enabled per IP Profile and WAN
Connection Profile.
• Last Member Query Interval – the amount of time in tenths of a second that the IGMP
gateway waits to receive a response to a Group-Specific Query message. The last member query interval is also the amount of time in seconds between successive GroupSpecific Query messages. The default last member query interval is 1 second (10 deciseconds).
• Last Member Query Count – the number of Group-Specific Query messages sent
before the gateway assumes that there are no members of the host group being queried on this interface. The default last member query count is 2.
• Fast Leave – set to off by default, fast leave enables a non-standard expedited leave
mechanism. The querier keeps track of which client is requesting which channel by IP
212
CONFIG Commands
address. When a leave message is received, the querier can check its internal table to
see if there are any more clients on this group. If there are none, it immediately sends
an IGMP leave message to the upstream querier.
• Log Enable – If set to on, all IGMP messages on both the LAN and the WAN will be
logged.
• Wireless Multicast to Unicast conversion – Only available if IGMP Snooping is
enabled. If set to on, the Gateway replaces the multicast MAC-address with the physical MAC-address of the wireless client. If there is more than one wireless client interested in the same multicast group, the router will revert to multicasting the stream
immediately. When one or more wireless clients leave a group, and the router determines that only a single wireless client is interested in the stream, it will once again unicast the stream.
set igmp snooping [ off | on ]
Enables IGMP Snooping.
set igmp robustness value
Sets IGMP robustness range: from 2 – 255. The default is 2.
set igmp query-intvl value
Sets the query-interval range: from 10 seconds – 600 seconds, The default is 125 seconds.
set igmp query-response-intvl value
Sets the query-response interval range: from 5 deci-seconds (tenths of a second) – 255
deci-seconds. The default is 100 deci-seconds.
set igmp unsol-report-intvl value
Sets the unsolicited report interval: the amount of time in seconds between repetitions of
a particular computer’s initial report of membership in a group. The default is 10 seconds.
213
set igmp version [ 1 | 2 | 3 ]
Sets the IGMP querier version: version 1, version 2, or version 3. If you know you will be
communicating with other hosts that are limited to v1, for backward compatibility, select 1;
otherwise, allow the default 3.
set igmp last-member-query-intvl value
Sets the last member query interval: the amount of time in tenths of a second that the
IGMP gateway waits to receive a response to a Group-Specific Query message. The last
member query interval is also the amount of time in seconds between successive GroupSpecific Query messages. The default is 1 second (10 deci-seconds).
set igmp last-member-query-count value
Sets the last member query count: the number of Group-Specific Query messages sent
before the gateway assumes that there are no members of the host group being queried
on this interface. The default is 2.
set igmp fast-leave [ off | on ]
Sets fast leave on or off. Set to off by default, fast leave enables a non-standard expedited
leave mechanism. The querier keeps track of which client is requesting which channel by IP
address. When a leave message is received, the querier can check its internal table to see
if there are any more clients on this group. If there are none, it immediately sends an IGMP
leave message to the upstream querier.
set igmp wireless-m2u [ on | off ]
This command allows you enable or disable wireless multicast-to-unicast if igmp snooping
is set to on.
set igmp log-enable [ on | off ]
If set to on, all IGMP messages on both the LAN and the WAN will be logged. Default is off.
214
CONFIG Commands
IP Settings
You can use the command line interface to specify whether TCP/IP is enabled, identify a
default Gateway, and to enter TCP/IP settings for the Motorola Netopia® Gateway LAN and
WAN ports.
☛
NOTE:
For the DSL platform you must identify the virtual PPP interface [vccn], a number from 1 to 8.
Common Settings
set ip option { on | off }
Enables or disables TCP/IP services in the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. You must enable
TCP/IP services before you can enter other TCP/IP settings for the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway. If you turn off TCP/IP services and save the new configuration, the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway clears its TCP/IP settings.
ARP Timeout Settings
set ip arp-timeout [ 60 ... 6000 ]
Sets the timeout value for ARP timeout. Default = 600 secs (10 mins); range = 60 secs 6000 secs (1–100 mins).
DSL Settings
set ip dsl vccn address ip_address
Assigns an IP address to the virtual circuit. Enter 0.0.0.0 if you want the virtual circuit to
obtain its IP address from a remote DHCP server.
215
set ip dsl vccn broadcast broadcast_address
Specifies the broadcast address for the TCP/IP network connected to the virtual circuit. IP
hosts use the broadcast address to send messages to every host on your network simultaneously.
The broadcast address for most networks is the network number followed by 255. For
example, the broadcast address for the 192.168.1.0 network would be 192.168.1.255.
set ip dsl vccn netmask netmask
Specifies the subnet mask for the TCP/IP network connected to the virtual circuit. The subnet mask specifies which bits of the 32-bit binary IP address represents network information. The default subnet mask for most networks is 255.255.255.0 (Class C subnet
mask).
set ip dsl vccn restrictions { admin-disabled | none }
Specifies restrictions on the types of traffic the Motorola Netopia® Gateway accepts over
the DSL virtual circuit. The admin-disabled argument means that access to the device
via telnet, web, and SNMP is disabled. RIP and ICMP traffic is still accepted. The none
argument means that all traffic is accepted.
set ip dsl vccn addr-mapping { on | off }
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to use network address translation (NAT) when communicating with remote routers. Address mapping lets you conceal
details of your network from remote routers. It also permits all LAN devices to share a single IP address. By default, address mapping is turned “On”.
set ip dsl vccn auto-sensing [ off | dhcp/pppoe | pppoe/pppoa ]
Enables or disables DHCP/PPPoE or PPPoE/PPPoA autosensing on the specified interface.
Setting this to DHCP/PPPoE enables automatic sensing of your WAN connection type:
PPPoE or DHCP. The gateway attempts to connect using PPPoE first. If the Gateway fails to
connect after 60 seconds, it switches to DHCP. As soon as it can connect via DHCP, the
Gateway chooses and sets DHCP as its default. Otherwise, after attempting to connect via
DHCP for 60 seconds, the Gateway switches back to PPPoE. The Gateway will continue to
switch back and forth in this manner until it successfully connects. Similarly, selecting
216
CONFIG Commands
PPPoE/PPPoA causes the Gateway to attempt to connect by trying these protocols in parallel, and using the first one that is successful.
set ip dsl vccn mcast-fwd [ on | off }
Enables or disables multi-cast forwarding on the specified interface. If set to on, this interface acts as an IGMP proxy host, and IGMP packets are transmitted and received on this
interface on behalf of IGMP hosts on the LAN interface.
set ip dsl vccn igmp-null-source-addr { on | off }
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to identify the source IP
address of every IGMP packet transmitted from this interface as 0.0.0.0 when mcast-fwd
is set to on. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a
publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface.
set ip dsl vccn unnumbered [ on | off }
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to have its WAN interface
unnumbered, i.e. set to 0. unnumbered option is only available if the address is set to 0
for the interface. Enables or disables unnumbered IP addressing (where an address of 0 is
allowed AND the DHCP client is disabled) on the specified interface. This setting applies to
native IP as well as PPP interfaces to support running an IPoE interface without an
address.
set ip dsl vccn rip-send { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) broadcasts to advertise its routing tables to other routers. RIP Version 2 (RIP-2) is an
extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1) that expands the amount of
useful information in the RIP packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share the same basic algorithms, RIP-2 supports several additional features, including inclusion of subnet masks in
RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broadcasting (which reduces
the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-2 with MD5 authentication is
an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an authentication key when
routes are advertised.
Depending on your network needs, you can configure your Motorola Netopia® Gateway to
support RIP-1, RIP-2, or RIP-2MD5.
217
If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-send-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a
maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation
of MD5 support.
set ip dsl vccn rip-receive
{ off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) broadcasts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers.
If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-receive-key. Keys are ASCII strings
with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support.
Ethernet LAN Settings
set ip ethernet A option { on | off }
Enables or disables communications through the designated Ethernet port in the Gateway.
You must enable TCP/IP functions for an Ethernet port before you can configure its network
settings.
set ip ethernet A address ip_address
Assigns an IP address to the Motorola Netopia® Gateway on the local area network. The IP
address you assign to the local Ethernet interface must be unique on your network. By
default, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway uses 192.168.0.1 as its LAN IP address.
set ip ethernet A broadcast broadcast_address
Specifies the broadcast address for the local Ethernet interface. IP hosts use the broadcast address to send messages to every host on your network simultaneously.
The broadcast address for most networks is the network number followed by 255. For
example, the broadcast address for the 192.168.1.0 network would be 192.168.1.255.
218
CONFIG Commands
set ip ethernet A netmask netmask
Specifies the subnet mask for the local Ethernet interface. The subnet mask specifies
which bits of the 32-bit binary IP address represent network information. The default subnet mask for most networks is 255.255.255.0 (Class C subnet mask).
set ip ethernet A restrictions { none | admin-disabled }
Specifies whether an administrator can open a telnet connection to a Motorola Netopia®
Gateway over an Ethernet interface (A = the LAN) to monitor and configure the unit.
The admin-disabled argument prevents access to the device via telnet, web, and SNMP.
By default, administrative restrictions are none on the LAN, but admin-disabled is set on
the WAN. This means that, by default, an administrator can open, for example, a telnet
connection from the LAN, but not the WAN.
set ip ethernet A rip-send
{ off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) broadcasts to advertise its routing tables to other routers on your network. RIP Version 2 (RIP-2) is an extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1) that
expands the amount of useful information in the RIP packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share
the same basic algorithms, RIP-2 supports several additional features, including inclusion
of subnet masks in RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broadcasting (which reduces the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-2 with
MD5 authentication is an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an authentication key when routes are advertised.
If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-send-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a
maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation
of MD5 support.
Depending on your network needs, you can configure your Motorola Netopia® Gateway to
support RIP-1, RIP-2, or RIP-2MD5.
219
set ip ethernet A rip-receive { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) broadcasts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers
on your network.
If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-receive-key. Keys are ASCII strings
with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support.
Additional subnets
See “DHCP Settings” on page 198 for subnet range configuration commands.
set ip ethernet A subnet [ 2 ... 8 ] option [ on | off ]
Enables or disables additional LAN subnets. Up to seven additional subnets may be configured.
set ip ethernet A subnet n address ip_address
Specifies an IP address for the subnet n, when subnet n option is on.
set ip ethernet A subnet n netmask netmask
Specifies the subnet mask for the subnet n, when subnet n option is on.
Default IP Gateway Settings
set ip gateway option { on | off }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should send packets to a default Gateway if it does not know how to reach the destination host.
set ip gateway interface { ip-address | ppp-vccn }
Specifies how the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should route information to the default
Gateway. If you select ip-address, you must enter the IP address of a host on a local or
220
CONFIG Commands
remote network. If you specify ppp, the Motorola Netopia® unit uses the default gateway
being used by the remote PPP peer.
IP-over-PPP Settings. Use the following commands to configure settings for routing IP
over a virtual PPP interface.
☛
NOTE:
For a DSL platform you must identify the virtual PPP interface [vccn], a number from 1 to 8.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] option { on | off }
Enables or disables IP routing through the virtual PPP interface. By default, IP routing is
turned on. If you turn off IP routing and save the new configuration, the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway clears IP routing settings
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] address ip_address
Assigns an IP address to the virtual PPP interface. If you specify an IP address other than
0.0.0.0, your Motorola Netopia® Gateway will not negotiate its IP address with the remote
peer. If the remote peer does not accept the IP address specified in the ip_address
argument as valid, the link will not come up.
The default value for the ip_address argument is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the virtual PPP interface will use the IP address assigned to it by the remote peer. Note that the
remote peer must be configured to supply an IP address to your Motorola Netopia® Gateway if you enter 0.0.0.0 for the ip_address argument.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] peer-address ip_address
Specifies the IP address of the peer on the other end of the PPP link. If you specify an IP
address other than 0.0.0.0, your Motorola Netopia® Gateway will not negotiate the remote
peer's IP address. If the remote peer does not accept the address in the ip_address
argument as its IP address (typically because it has been configured with another IP
address), the link will not come up.
221
The default value for the ip_address argument is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the virtual PPP interface will accept the IP address returned by the remote peer. If you enter
0.0.0.0, the peer system must be configured to supply this address.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] restrictions { admin-disabled | none }
Specifies restrictions on the types of traffic the Motorola Netopia® Gateway accepts over
the PPP virtual circuit. The admin-disabled argument means that access to the device
via telnet, web, and SNMP is disabled. RIP and ICMP traffic is still accepted. The none
argument means that all traffic is accepted.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] addr-mapping [ on | off ]
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to use network address translation (NAT) when communicating with remote routers. Address mapping lets you conceal
details of your network from remote routers. It also permits all LAN devices to share a single IP address. By default, address mapping is turned “On”.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] auto-sensing [ off | dhcp/pppoe | pppoe/pppoa ]
Enables or disables DHCP/PPPoE or PPPoE/PPPoA autosensing on the specified interface.
Setting this to DHCP/PPPoE enables automatic sensing of your WAN connection type:
PPPoE or DHCP. The gateway attempts to connect using PPPoE first. If the Gateway fails to
connect after 60 seconds, it switches to DHCP. As soon as it can connect via DHCP, the
Gateway chooses and sets DHCP as its default. Otherwise, after attempting to connect via
DHCP for 60 seconds, the Gateway switches back to PPPoE. The Gateway will continue to
switch back and forth in this manner until it successfully connects. Similarly, selecting
PPPoE/PPPoA causes the Gateway to attempt to connect by trying these protocols in parallel, and using the first one that is successful.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] rip-send { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway unit should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broadcasts to advertise its routing tables to routers on the other side of the PPP
link. An extension of the original Routing Information Protocol (RIP-1), RIP Version 2 (RIP-2)
expands the amount of useful information in the packets. While RIP-1 and RIP-2 share the
same basic algorithms, RIP-2 supports several new features. For example, inclusion of
subnet masks in RIP packets and implementation of multicasting instead of broadcasting.
This last feature reduces the load on hosts which do not support routing protocols. RIP-2
222
CONFIG Commands
with MD5 authentication is an extension of RIP-2 that increases security by requiring an
authentication key when routes are advertised.
This command is only available when address mapping for the specified virtual circuit is
turned “off”.
If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-send-key. Keys are ASCII strings with a
maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation
of MD5 support.
set ip ip-ppp [vccn] rip-receive { off | v1 | v2 | v1-compat | v2-MD5 }
Specifies whether the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should use Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) broadcasts to update its routing tables with information received from other routers
on the other side of the PPP link.
If you specify v2-MD5, you must also specify a rip-receive-key. Keys are ASCII strings
with a maximum of 31 characters, and must match the other router(s) keys for proper operation of MD5 support.
set ip ip-ppp vccn igmp-null-source-addr [ on | off ]
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to identify the source IP
address of every IGMP packet transmitted from this interface as 0.0.0.0 when mcast-fwd
is set to on. This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a
publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface.
set ip ip-ppp vccn mcast-fwd [ on | off ]
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway interface to act as an IGMP
proxy host.
set ip ip-ppp vccn unnumbered [ on | off ]
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to have its WAN interface
unnumbered, i.e. set to 0.
223
set ip ip-ppp vccn dns acquired-dns-priority [ 0 - 255 ]
Sets the priority for DNS acquired via PPP. See “Domain Name System Settings” on
page 208 for more information.
224
CONFIG Commands
Static ARP Settings
Your Motorola Netopia® Gateway maintains a dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
table to map IP addresses to Ethernet (MAC) addresses. Your Motorola Netopia® Gateway
populates this ARP table dynamically, by retrieving IP address/MAC address pairs only
when it needs them. Optionally, you can define static ARP entries to map IP addresses to
their corresponding Ethernet MAC addresses. Unlike dynamic ARP table entries, static ARP
table entries do not time out.
You can configure as many as 16 static ARP table entries for a Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Use the following commands to add static ARP entries to the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway static ARP table:
set ip static-arp ip-address ip_address
Specifies the IP address for the static ARP entry. Enter an IP address in the ip_address
argument in dotted decimal format. The ip_address argument cannot be 0.0.0.0.
set ip static-arp ip-address ip_address hardware-address
MAC_address
Specifies the Ethernet hardware address for the static ARP entry. Enter an Ethernet hardware address in the MAC_address argument in nn.nn.nn.nn.nn.nn (hexadecimal) format.
IGMP Forwarding
set ip igmp-forwarding [ off | on ]
Turns IP IGMP forwarding off or on. The default is off.
IPsec Passthrough
set ip ipsec-passthrough [ off | on ]
Turns IPsec client passthrough off or on. The default is on.
225
IP Prioritization
set ip prioritize [ off | on ]
Allows you to support traffic that has the TOS bit set. This defaults to off.
226
CONFIG Commands
Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
set diffserv option [ off | on ]
Turns the DiffServ option off (default) or on. on enables the service and IP TOS bits are
used, even if no flows are defined. Consequently, if the end-point nodes provide TOS settings from an application that can be interpreted as one of the supported states, the Gateway will handle it as if it actively marked the TOS field itself.
☛
NOTE:
The Gateway itself will not override TOS bit settings made by the endpoints.
Support for source-provided IP TOS priorities within the Gateway is achieved
simply by turning the DiffServe option “on” and by setting the lohi-asymmetry
to adjust the behavior of the Gateway’s internal queues.
set diffserv lohi-ratio [ 60 - 100 percent ]
Sets a percentage between 60 and 100 used to regulate the level of packets allowed to be
pending in the low priority queue. The default is 92. It can be used in some degree to
adjust the relative throughput bandwidth for low- versus high-priority traffic.
☛
NOTE:
diffserv lohi-ratio has been removed for VDSL, ADSL bonded units.
227
set diffserv custom-flows name name
protocol [ TCP | UDP | ICMP | other ]
direction [ outbound | inbound | both ]
start-port [ 0 - 65535 ]
end-port [ 0 - 65535 ]
inside-ip inside-ip-addr
inside-ip-mask inside-ip-netmask
outside-ip outside-ip-addr
outside-ip-mask outside-ip-netmask
qos [ off | assure | expedite | network-control ]
Defines or edits a custom flow. Select a name for the custom-flow from the set command.
The CLI will step into the newly-named or previously-defined flow for editing.
• protocol – Allows you to choose the IP protocol for the stream: TCP, UDP, ICMP, or
•
•
•
•
228
other.
other is appropriate for setting up flows on protocols with non-standard port definitions,
for example, IPSEC or PPTP. If you select other, an additional field, numbered-protocol will appear with a range of 0–255. Choose the protocol number from this field.
direction – Allows you to choose whether to apply the marking and gateway queue
behavior for inbound packets, outbound packets, or to both. If the Gateway is used as
an “edge” gateway, its more important function is to mark the packets for high-priority
streams in the outbound direction.
start-port/end-port – Allows you to specify a range of ports to check for a particular
flow, if the protocol selection is TCP or UDP.
inside-ip/mask – If you want packets originating from a certain LAN IP address to be
marked, enter the IP address and subnet mask here. If you leave the address equal to
zero, this check is ignored for outbound packets. The check is always ignored for
inbound packets. The DiffServe queuing function must be applied ahead of NAT; and,
before NAT re-maps the inbound packets, all inbound packets are destined for the Gateway's WAN IP address.
outside-ip/mask – If you want packets destined for and originating from a certain WAN
IP address to be marked, enter this address and subnet mask here. If you leave the
address equal to zero, the outside address check is ignored. For outbound flows, the
outside address is the destination IP address for the packets. For inbound packets, the
outside address is the source IP address for the packets.
Note:
When setting the Inside/Outside IP Address/Netmask settings, note that a netmask
value can be used to configure for a network rather than a single IP address.
CONFIG Commands
• qos – Allows you to specify the Quality of Service for the flow: off, assure, expedite or
network-control. These are used both to mark the IP TOS byte and to distribute packets into the queues as if they were marked by the source.
QoS Setting
TOS Bit Value
Behavior
Off
TOS=000
This custom flow is disabled. You can activate it by selecting one
of the two settings below. This setting allows you to pre-define
flows without actually activating them.
Assure
TOS=001
Use normal queuing and throughput rules, but do not drop packets if possible. Appropriate for applications with no guaranteed
delivery mechanism.
Expedite
TOS=101
Use minimum delay. Appropriate for VoIP and video applications.
Network Control
TOS=111
Use highest possible priority.
Packet Mapping Configuration
set diffserv qos [ network-control-queue | expedite-queue |
assured-queue | best-effort-queue ] queue_name
Specifies the Diffserv QoS queue mapping associations.
• queue_name - the basic queue name to which classified packets are directed.
By default the following mappings are created:
set
set
set
set
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
qos
qos
qos
qos
network-control-queue basic_q0
expedite-queue basic_q1
assured-queue basic_q2
best-effort-queue basic_q3
set diffserv qos dscp-map [ default | custom ]
• default – the default DSCP-queue mappings are used
• custom – allows you to set up customized mappings between DSCP code points and
queue types.
If custom is selected, the following can be configured:
set diffserv qos dscp-map-0
[ best-effort | assured | expedite | network-control ]
229
set diffserv qos dscp-map-1
[ best-effort | assured | expedite | network-control ]
...
set diffserv qos dscp-map-31
[ best-effort | assured | expedite | network-control ]
By default, the following settings are used in custom mode:
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
230
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
diffserv
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
qos
dscp-map-0 best-effort
dscp-map-1 best-effort
dscp-map-2 best-effort
dscp-map-3 best-effort
dscp-map-4 best-effort
dscp-map-5 assured
dscp-map-6 best-effort
dscp-map-7 best-effort
dscp-map-8 best-effort
dscp-map-9 assured
dscp-map-10 best-effort
dscp-map-11 best-effort
dscp-map-12 best-effort
dscp-map-13 assured
dscp-map-14 best-effort
dscp-map-15 best-effort
dscp-map-16 best-effort
dscp-map-17 assured
dscp-map-18 best-effort
dscp-map-19 best-effort
dscp-map-20 best-effort
dscp-map-21 best-effort
dscp-map-22 best-effort
dscp-map-23 expedite
dscp-map-24 network-control
dscp-map-25 network-control
dscp-map-26 network-control
dscp-map-27 network-control
dscp-map-28 network-control
dscp-map-29 network-control
dscp-map-30 network-control
dscp-map-31 network-control
CONFIG Commands
Queue Configuration
Beginning with Firmware Version 7.7.4, the queuing characteristics of all “N” and “-02”
model Gateway’s WAN interface can now be configured for:
• strict priority queuing (as currently)
• weighted fair queuing
• rate-limiting funnel
☛
Note:
The configuration mechanism is designed to be flexible enough to accommodate complex queuing requirements. Configurations not supported by the
Gateway will be flagged during configuration verification.
You configure the WAN outbound queue as follows:
• create and configure one or more queues, which can be a basic queue or a priority
queue comprising a group of basic queues, a weighted fair queue comprising a group of
basic queues, or a funnel comprising a group of basic queues;
• assign a queue instance to the Ethernet WAN interface;
• map packet attributes to a queue.
The same queue name can be assigned to multiple interfaces which require identical
queue configuration, however currently the only interface available for queueing configuration is ethernet 1.
To help you configure queues, and to maintain compatibility with previous firmware
releases, several queues are set up automatically on upgrade to Version 7.7, or upon a
factory reset.
231
set queue name queue_name option [ on | off ]
type [ basic | wfq | priority | funnel ]
Creates a queue named queue_name and assigns a type:
•
•
•
•
basic – Basic Queue
wfq – Weighted Fair Queue
priority – Priority Queue
funnel – Funnel Queue
Basic Queue
set queue name basic_queue_name option [ on | off ]
set queue name basic_queue_name type basic
Specifies the Basic Queue named basic_queue_name attributes. Basic queues have one
input and one output. The basic queue is assigned an ID, with the following attribute: when
the queue is full, discard.
By default, the following Basic Queues are created:
•
•
•
•
232
basic_q0
basic_q1
basic_q2
basic_q3
CONFIG Commands
Weighted Fair Queue
set queue name wfq option [ on | off ]
set queue name wf_queue_name type wfq
set queue name wf_queue_name weight-type [ relative | bps ]
set queue name wf_queue_name entry n input input_queue_name
set queue name wf_queue_name entry n weight weight
set queue name wf_queue_name entry n share-bw [ on | off ]
set queue name wf_queue_name entry n default-input queue_name
Specifies the attributes of the Weighted Fair Queue named wf_queue_name.
• wf_queue_name – name of weighted fair queue
A weighted fair queue can contain up to 8 input queues. For each input queue, the following is configured:
• weight-type – the weighted fair queue configuration allows you to set the rate in bits
•
•
•
•
•
per second (bps) or percentage of the line rate (relative). bps is the default.
n – entry number for this input queue
input_queue_name – name of input queue
weight_value – numeric relative weight of queue
share-bw – if enabled, the bandwidth for this queue can be shared between other
queues when idle.
default-input – specifies the default input queue name.
The default special queuing configuration shapes the rate of a custom flow toward the
Remote Management Server.
By default, the following WFQ is created:
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
option on
type wfq
weight-type bps
entry 1 input "basic_q0"
entry 1 weight 10000
entry 1 share-bw off
entry 2 input "basic_q1"
entry 2 weight 20000
entry 2 share-bw off
entry 3 input "basic_q2"
233
set
set
set
set
set
set
234
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
name
name
name
name
name
name
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
"wfq"
entry 3 weight 30000
entry 3 share-bw off
entry 4 input "basic_q3"
entry 4 weight 40000
entry 4 share-bw off
default-input "basic_q0"
CONFIG Commands
Priority Queue
set queue name priority_queue_name option [ off | on ]
set queue name priority_queue_name type priority
set queue name priority_queue_name default-input queue_name
A priority queue can contain up to 8 input queues. For each input queue, the following is
configured:
set queue name priority_queue_name entry n
input input_queue_name
set queue name priority_queue_name entry n priority priority_value
Specifies the Priority Queue named priority_queue_name attributes.
• priority_queue_name – name of priority queue
• input_queue_name – name of input queue
• priority_value – numeric relative priority of queue. The higher the number, the higher
the priority of the queue.
• default-input – specifies the default input queue name.
By default, the following priority queue is created:
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
queue
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
"pq"
option on
type priority
entry 1 input "basic_q0"
entry 1 priority 10
entry 2 input "basic_q1"
entry 2 priority 20
entry 3 input "basic_q2"
entry 3 priority 30
entry 4 input "basic_q3"
entry 4 priority 40
default-input "basic_q0"
235
Funnel Queue
A funnel queue is used to limit the rate of the transmission below the actual line rate:
set queue name funnel_queue_name option [ on | off ]
set queue name funnel_queue_name type funnel
set queue name funnel_queue_name input input_queue_name
set queue name funnel_queue_name bps bps
Specifies the Funnel Queue named funnel_queue_name attributes.
• funnel_queue_name – name of funnel queue
• input_queue_name – name of input queue
• bps – max bits per second permitted through funnel queue
By default, the following funnel queues are created:
Rate-limiting priority queue to 100Kbps:
set
set
set
set
queue
queue
queue
queue
name
name
name
name
pq-100kbps
pq-100kbps
pq-100kbps
pq-100kbps
option on
type funnel
input pq
bps 100000
Rate-limiting weighted fair queue to 100Kbps:
set
set
set
set
queue
queue
queue
queue
name
name
name
name
wfq-100kbps
wfq-100kbps
wfq-100kbps
wfq-100kbps
option on
type funnel
input wfq
bps 100000
Interface Queue Assignment
The WAN ethernet queue is assigned as follows:
set [ ethernet ethernet | ip ethernet B | ip-ppp vccn ] tx-queue
queue_name
By default, the WAN ethernet interface is assigned the default priority queue:
set ethernet ethernet B tx-queue pq
Other interfaces may likewise be assigned tx-queue values.
236
CONFIG Commands
SIP Passthrough
set ip sip-passthrough [ on | off ]
Turns Session Initiation Protocol application layer gateway client passthrough on or off.
The default is on.
Session Initiation Protocol, is a signaling protocol for Internet conferencing, telephony,
presence, events notification and instant messaging.
RTSP Passthrough
set ip ethernet B rtsp-passthrough [ off | on ]
Turns Real Time Streaming Protocol application layer gateway client passthrough on or off.
RTSP is a protocol used for streaming media. It allows a client remotely to control a
streaming media server. A typical application is Video-on-Demand (VoD). The default is on.
Static Route Settings
A static route identifies a manually configured pathway to a remote network. Unlike
dynamic routes, which are acquired and confirmed periodically from other routers, static
routes do not time out. Consequently, static routes are useful when working with PPP,
since an intermittent PPP link may make maintenance of dynamic routes problematic.
You can configure as many as 32 static IP routes for a Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Use
the following commands to maintain static routes to the Motorola Netopia® Gateway routing table:
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address
Specifies the network address for the static route. Enter a network address in the
net_address argument in dotted decimal format. The net_address argument cannot
be 0.0.0.0.
237
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address
netmask netmask
Specifies the subnet mask for the IP network at the other end of the static route. Enter the
netmask argument in dotted decimal format. The subnet mask associated with the destination network must represent the same network class (A, B, or C) or a lower class (such
as a class C subnet mask for class B network number) to be valid.
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address
interface { ip-address | ppp-vccn }
Specifies the interface through which the static route is accessible.
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address
gateway-address gate_address
Specifies the IP address of the Gateway for the static route. The default Gateway must be
located on a network connected to the Motorola Netopia® Gateway configured interface.
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address
metric integer
Specifies the metric (hop count) for the static route. The default metric is 1. Enter a number from 1 to 15 for the integer argument to indicate the number of routers (actual or best
guess) a packet must traverse to reach the remote network.
You can enter a metric of 1 to indicate either:
• The remote network is one router away and the static route is the best way to reach it;
• The remote network is more than one router away but the static route should not be
replaced by a dynamic route, even if the dynamic route is more efficient.
set ip static-routes destination-network net_address
rip-advertise [ splitHorizon | always | never ]
Specifies whether the gateway should use Routing Information Protocol (RIP) broadcasts to
advertise to other routers on your network and which mode to use. The default is splitHorizon.
238
CONFIG Commands
delete ip static-routes destination-network net_address
Deletes a static route. Deleting a static route removes all information associated with that
route.
IPMaps Settings
set ip-maps name <name> internal-ip <ip address>
Specifies the name and static ip address of the LAN device to be mapped.
set ip-maps name <name> external-ip <ip address>
Specifies the name and static ip address of the WAN device to be mapped.
Up to 8 mapped static IP addresses are supported.
239
Network Address Translation (NAT) Default Settings
NAT default settings let you specify whether you want your Motorola Netopia® Gateway to
forward NAT traffic to a default server when it doesn’t know what else to do with it. The
NAT default host function is useful in situations where you cannot create a specific NAT pinhole for a traffic stream because you cannot anticipate what port number an application
might use. For example, some network games select arbitrary port numbers when a connection is being opened. By identifying your computer (or another host on your network) as
a NAT default server, you can specify that NAT traffic that would otherwise be discarded by
the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should be directed to a specific hosts.
set nat-default mode [ off | default-server | ip-passthrough ]
Specifies whether you want your Motorola Netopia® Gateway to forward unsolicited traffic
from the WAN to a default server or an IP passthrough host when it doesn’t know what else
to do with it.
set nat-default dhcp-enable [ on | off ]
Allows the IP passthrough host to acquire its IP address via DHCP, if ip-passthrough is
enabled.
set nat-default address ip_address
Specifies the IP address of the NAT default server.
set nat-default host-hardware-address MAC_address }
Specifies the hardware (MAC) address of the IP passthrough host. If the MAC address is
specified as all-zeroes, the first DHCP client that requests an IP address gets the
passthrough address.
Network Address Translation (NAT) Pinhole Settings
NAT pinholes let you pass specific types of network traffic through the NAT interfaces on
the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. NAT pinholes allow you to route selected types of network
traffic, such as FTP requests or HTTP (Web) connections, to a specific host behind the
Motorola Netopia® Gateway transparently.
240
CONFIG Commands
To set up NAT pinholes, you identify the type(s) of traffic you want to redirect by port number, and you specify the internal host to which each specified type of traffic should be
directed.
The following list identifies protocol type and port number for common TCP/IP protocols:
•
•
•
•
•
FTP (TCP 21)
telnet (TCP 23)
SMTP (TCP 25),
TFTP (UDP 69)
SNMP (TCP 161, UDP 161)
set pinhole name name
Specifies the identifier for the entry in the router's pinhole table. You can name pinhole
table entries sequentially (1, 2, 3), by port number (21, 80, 23), by protocol, or by some
other naming scheme.
set pinhole name name protocol-select { tcp | udp }
Specifies the type of protocol being redirected.
set pinhole name name external-port-start [ 0 - 49151 ]
Specifies the first port number in the range being translated.
set pinhole name name external-port-end [ 0 - 49151 ]
Specifies the last port number in the range being translated.
set pinhole name name internal-ip internal-ip
Specifies the IP address of the internal host to which traffic of the specified type should be
transferred.
241
set pinhole name name internal-port [ 0 - 65535 ]
Specifies the port number your Motorola Netopia® Gateway should use when forwarding
traffic of the specified type. Under most circumstances, you would use the same number
for the external and internal port.
PPPoE /PPPoA Settings
You can use the following commands to configure basic settings, port authentication settings, and peer authentication settings for PPP interfaces on your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
Configuring Basic PPP Settings.
☛
NOTE:
For the DSL platform you must identify the virtual PPP interface [vccn], a number from 1 to 8.
set ppp module [vccn] option { on | off }
Enables or disables PPP on the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
set ppp module [vccn] auto-connect { on | off }
Supports manual mode required for some vendors. The default on is not normally
changed. If auto-connect is disabled (off), you must manually start/stop a ppp connection.
set ppp module [vccn] mru integer
Specifies the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) for the PPP interface. The integer argument
can be any number between 128 and 1492 for PPPoE; 1500 otherwise.
set ppp module [vccn] magic-number { on | off }
Enables or disables LCP magic number negotiation.
242
CONFIG Commands
set ppp module [vccn] protocol-compression { on | off }
Specifies whether you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to compress the PPP Protocol
field when it transmits datagrams over the PPP link.
set ppp module [vccn] lcp-echo-requests { on | off }
Specifies whether you want your Motorola Netopia® Gateway to send LCP echo requests.
You should turn off LCP echoing if you do not want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to drop
a PPP link to a nonresponsive peer.
set ppp module [vccn] echo-period integer
Specifies the number of seconds the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should wait before sending another echo from an LCP echo request. The integer argument can be any number from
between 5 and 300 (seconds).
set ppp module [vccn] lost-echoes-max integer
Specifies the maximum number of lost echoes the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should tolerate before bringing down the PPP connection. The integer argument can be any number
from between 1 and 20.
set ppp module [vccn] failures-max integer
Specifies the maximum number of Configure-NAK messages the PPP module can send
without having sent a Configure-ACK message. The integer argument can be any number
between 1 and 20.
set ppp module [vccn] configure-max integer
Specifies the maximum number of unacknowledged configuration requests that your Motorola Netopia® Gateway will send. The integer argument can be any number between 1 and
20.
243
set ppp module [vccn] terminate-max integer
Specifies the maximum number of unacknowledged termination requests that your Motorola Netopia® Gateway will send before terminating the PPP link. The integer argument can
be any number between 1 and 10.
set ppp module [vccn] restart-timer integer
Specifies the number of seconds the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should wait before
retransmitting a configuration or termination request. The integer argument can be any
number between 1 and 30.
set ppp module [vccn] connection-type { instant-on | always-on }
Specifies whether a PPP connection is maintained by the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
when it is unused for extended periods. If you specify always-on, the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway never shuts down the PPP link. If you specify instant-on, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway shuts down the PPP link after the number of seconds specified in the timeout setting (below) if no traffic is moving over the circuit.
set ppp module [vccn] time-out integer
If you specified a connection type of instant-on, specifies the number of seconds, in the
range 30 - 3600, with a default value of 300, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway should wait
for communication activity before terminating the PPP link.
244
CONFIG Commands
Configuring Port Authentication. You can use the following command to specify how
your Motorola Netopia® Gateway should respond when it receives an authentication
request from a remote peer.
The settings for port authentication on the local Motorola Netopia® Gateway must match
the authentication that is expected by the remote peer. For example, if the remote peer
requires CHAP authentication and has a name and CHAP secret for the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway, you must enable CHAP and specify the same name and secret on the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway before the link can be established.
set ppp module [vccn] port-authentication
option [ off | on | pap-only | chap-only ]
Specifying on turns both PAP and CHAP on, or you can select PAP or CHAP. Specify the
username and password when port authentication is turned on (both CHAP and PAP,
CHAP or PAP.) Authentication must be enabled before you can enter other information.
set ppp module [vccn] port-authentication username username
The username argument is 1 – 255 alphanumeric characters. The information you enter
must match the username configured in the PPP peer's authentication database.
set ppp module [vccn] port-authentication password password
The password argument is 1 – 128 alphanumeric characters. The information you enter
must match the password used by the PPP peer.
245
PPPoE with IPoE Settings
Ethernet WAN platforms
set wan-over-ether pppoe [ on | off ]
Enables or disables PPPoE on the Ethernet WAN interface.
set wan-over-ether pppoe-with-ipoe [ on | off ]
Enables or disables the PPPoE with IPoE support on Ethernet WAN, including VDSL, platforms when pppoe option is set to on.
When pppoe-with-ipoe is set to on, an additional interface, “ethernet C,” becomes available.
set wan-over-ether ipoe-sessions [ 1 - 4 ]
Sets the number of IPoE sessions, up to four, on Ethernet WAN, including VDSL, platforms.
☛
NOTE:
Enabling pppoe-with-ipoe disables support for multiple PPPoE sessions.
Example:
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
246
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
ethernet
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
option on
address 0.0.0.0
broadcast 0.0.0.255
netmask 255.255.255.0
restrictions admin-disabled
addr-mapping on
dns acquired-dns-priority 20
mcast-fwd on
igmp-null-source-addr off
tx-queue "none"
unnumbered off
rip-receive off
proxy-arp off
CONFIG Commands
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
ip-ppp
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
enet-B
option on
address 0.0.0.0
peer-address 0.0.0.0
restrictions admin-disabled
addr-mapping on
dns acquired-dns-priority 20
igmp-null-source-addr off
tx-queue "none"
mcast-fwd on
unnumbered off
rip-receive off
ADSL platforms
You must configure two VCCs with the same VPI/VCI to enable concurrent PPPoE and IPoE
support, and you will need to configure the individual settings for each interface for proper
operation.
set atm vcc n encap pppoe-llc
Specifies that the VCC will allow a second VCC with the same VPI/VCI values as the first.
pppoe-llc denotes this special case.
Example:
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
atm
atm
atm
atm
atm
atm
atm
atm
atm
option on
vcc 1 option on
vcc 1 vpi 0
vcc 1 vci 35
vcc 1 encap pppoe-llc
vcc 2 option on
vcc 2 vpi 0
vcc 2 vci 35
vcc 2 encap ether-llc
This will allow you to configure the second WAN interface.
set atm vcc 2 vpi 0
set atm vcc 2 vci 35
set atm vcc 2 encap ether-llc
...
247
set ip ip-ppp vcc1 mcast-fwd [ on | off }
Enables or disables multi-cast forwarding on the specified interface. If set to on, this interface acts as an IGMP proxy host, and IGMP packets are transmitted and received on this
interface on behalf of IGMP hosts on the LAN interface. See “IGMP Settings” on page 211
for more information.
set ip ip-ppp vcc1 igmp-null-source-addr [ off | on ]
Enables or disables IGMP null source address, if mcast-fwd is set to on. If enabled, the
source IP address of every IGMP packet transmitted from this interface is set to 0.0.0.0.
This complies with the requirements of TR-101, and removes the need for a publicly advertised IP address on the WAN interface.
Ethernet Port Settings
set ethernet ethernet A mode { auto | 100M-full | 100M-full-fixed |
100M-half-fixed | 10M-full-fixed | 10M-half-fixed |
100M-half | 10M-full | 10M-half }
Allows mode setting for the ethernet port. Only supported on units without a LAN switch, or
dual ethernet products (338x). In the dual ethernet case, “ethernet B” would be specified
for the WAN port. The default is auto.
248
CONFIG Commands
802.3ah Ethernet OAM Settings
802.3ah Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) Operations Administration and Maintenance
(OAM) is a group of network management functions that provide network fault indication,
performance information, and diagnosis using special-purpose Ethernet OAM frames.
These are exchanged between your Gateway and service provider Access Node (AN)
devices for network fault management, performance analysis and fault isolation.
All VDSL and Ethernet WAN Motorola Netopia Gateways support Ethernet OAM options.
More Ethernet Packet-Transfer-Mode (PTM) enabled xDSL Motorola Netopia Gateways will
support 802.3ah Ethernet OAM options in future releases.
802.3ah Ethernet OAM exchanges periodic Ethernet OAM heartbeat frames between the
endpoints of the physical link being monitored, and thus discovers and keeps-alive the Link
connectivity and reports faults if the link goes down. Supported OAM request and
response types are: remote loopback enable, remote loopback disable, variable request,
variable response.
set ethernet oam ah option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables Ethernet OAM. Default is off.
set ethernet oam ah pass-through [ off | on ]
Enable or disable Ethernet OAM pass-through mode. Default is off.
Warning: This is a DEBUG feature. Leave it off unless you know exactly what you are
doing.
set ethernet oam ah mode [ active | passive ]
Specifies the Ethernet OAM mode. Default is active.
set ethernet oam ah pdu-size-max [ 64 - 1518 ]
Specifies the Maximum Protocol Data Unit (PDU) size. Default is 1518.
249
set ethernet oam ah discovery-timer [ 1 - 300 ]
Specifies the discovery timer value for continuity check in seconds. Range is 1 – 300 seconds. Default is 1.
set ethernet oam ah keepalive-timer [ 5 - 305 ]
Specifies the keep-alive timer value in seconds. Range is 5 – 305 seconds. Default is 5.
etheroam ah ping
Sends OAM remote loopback request in active mode.
250
CONFIG Commands
Command Line Interface Preference Settings
You can set command line interface preferences to customize your environment.
set preference verbose { on | off }
Specifies whether you want command help and prompting information displayed. By
default, the command line interface verbose preference is turned off. If you turn it on, the
command line interface displays help for a node when you navigate to that node.
set preference more lines
Specifies how many lines of information you want the command line interface to display at
one time. The lines argument specifies the number of lines you want to see at one time.
The range is 1-65535. By default, the command line interface shows you 22 lines of text
before displaying the prompt: More …[y|n] ?.
If you enter 1000 for the lines argument, the command line interface displays information
as an uninterrupted stream (which is useful for capturing information to a text file).
251
Port Renumbering Settings
If you use NAT pinholes to forward HTTP or telnet traffic through your Motorola Netopia®
Gateway to an internal host, you must change the port numbers the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway uses for its own configuration traffic. For example, if you set up a NAT pinhole to
forward network traffic on Port 80 (HTTP) to another host, you would have to tell the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to listen for configuration connection requests on a port number
other than 80, such as 6080.
After you have changed the port numbers the Motorola Netopia® Gateway uses for its configuration traffic, you must use those port numbers instead of the standard numbers when
configuring the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. For example, if you move the router's Web service to port “6080” on a box with a system (DNS) name of “superbox”, you would enter the
URL http://superbox:6080 in a Web browser to open the Motorola Netopia® Gateway
graphical user interface. Similarly, you would have to configure your telnet application to
use the appropriate port when opening a configuration connection to your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
set servers web-http [ 1 - 65534 ]
Specifies the port number for HTTP (web) communication with the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Because port numbers in the range 0-1024 are used by other protocols, you should
use numbers in the range 1025-65534 when assigning new port numbers to the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway web configuration interface. A setting of 0 (zero) will turn the server off.
set servers telnet-tcp [ 1 - 65534 ]
Specifies the port number for telnet (CLI) communication with the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Because port numbers in the range 0-1024 are used by other protocols, you should
use numbers in the range 1025-65534 when assigning new port numbers to the Motorola
Netopia® Gateway telnet configuration interface. A setting of 0 (zero) will turn the server
off.
☛
NOTE:
You cannot specify a port setting of 0 (zero) for both the web and telnet ports
at the same time. This would prevent you from accessing the Gateway.
252
CONFIG Commands
Security Settings
Security settings include the Firewall, Packet Filtering, Stateful Inspection, and IPSec
parameters. Some of the security functionality is keyed.
Firewall Settings (for BreakWater Firewall)
set security firewall option [ ClearSailing | SilentRunning |
LANdLocked ]
BreakWater Basic Firewall. BreakWater delivers an easily selectable set of pre-configured firewall protection levels. For simple implementation these settings (comprised of
three levels) are readily available through Motorola Netopia®’s embedded web server
interface.
BreakWater Basic Firewall’s three settings are:
• ClearSailing
ClearSailing, BreakWater's default setting, supports both inbound and outbound traffic.
It is the only basic firewall setting that fully interoperates with all other Motorola Netopia® software features.
• SilentRunning
Using this level of firewall protection allows transmission of outbound traffic on pre-configured TCP/UDP ports. It disables any attempt for inbound traffic to identify the Gateway. This is the Internet equivalent of having an unlisted number.
• LANdLocked
The third option available turns off all inbound and outbound traffic, isolating the LAN
and disabling all WAN traffic.
☛
NOTE:
BreakWater Basic Firewall operates independent of the NAT functionality on
the Gateway.
253
TIPS for making your BreakWater Basic Firewall Selection
Application
Select this Level
Other Considerations
Typical Internet usage
(browsing, e-mail)
Multi-player online
gaming
SilentRunning
Going on vacation
Finished online use for
the day
Chatting online or using
instant messaging
LANdLocked
LANdLocked
ClearSailing
ClearSailing
Set Pinholes; once defined, pinholes will be
active whenever ClearSailing is set.
Restore SilentRunning when finished.
Protects your connection while your away.
This protects you instead of disconnecting your
Gateway connection.
Set Pinholes; once defined, pinholes will be
active whenever ClearSailing is set.
Restore SilentRunning when finished.
Basic Firewall Background
As a device on the Internet, a Motorola Netopia® Gateway requires an IP address in order
to send or receive traffic.
The IP traffic sent or received have an associated application port which is dependent on
the nature of the connection request. In the IP protocol standard the following session
types are common applications:
• ICMP
• SNMP
• HTTP
• telnet
• FTP
• DHCP
By receiving a response to a scan from a port or series of ports (which is the expected
behavior according to the IP standard), hackers can identify an existing device and gain a
potential opening for access to an internet-connected device.
To protect LAN users and their network from these types of attacks, BreakWater offers
three levels of increasing protection.
The following tables indicate the state of ports associated with session types, both on
the WAN side and the LAN side of the Gateway.
254
CONFIG Commands
This table shows how inbound traffic is treated. Inbound means the traffic is coming from
the WAN into the WAN side of the Gateway.
Gateway: WAN Side
BreakWater Setting >>
Port
20
21
23
23
80
80
67
68
161
Session Type
ftp data
ftp control
telnet external
telnet Motorola Netopia®
server
http external
http Motorola Netopia® server
DHCP client
DHCP server
snmp
ping (ICMP)
ClearSailing
SilentRunning
LANdLocked
--------------Port State----------------------Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Not Applicable
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Not Applicable
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Not Applicable
Disabled
Disabled
This table shows how outbound traffic is treated. Outbound means the traffic is coming
from the LAN-side computers into the LAN side of the Gateway.
Gateway: LAN Side
BreakWater Setting >>
Port
20
21
23
23
80
80
67
Session Type
ftp data
ftp control
telnet external
telnet Motorola Netopia®
server
http external
http Motorola Netopia® server
DHCP client
ClearSailing
SilentRunning
LANdLocked
--------------Port State----------------------Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Not Applicable
Enabled
Enabled
Not Applicable
Disabled
Enabled
Not Applicable
255
68
161
☛
DHCP server
snmp
ping (ICMP)
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
WAN - Disabled
LAN Local Address
Only
NOTE:
The Gateway’s WAN DHCP client port in SilentRunning mode is enabled. This
feature allows end users to continue using DHCP-served IP addresses from
their Service Providers, while having no identifiable presence on the Internet.
SafeHarbour IPSec Settings
SafeHarbour VPN is a tunnel between the local network and another geographically dispersed network that is interconnected over the Internet. This VPN tunnel provides a
secure, cost-effective alternative to dedicated leased lines. Internet Protocol Security
(IPsec) is a series of services including encryption, authentication, integrity, and replay protection. Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is the key management protocol of IPsec that establishes keys for encryption and decryption. Because this VPN software implementation is
built to these standards, the other side of the tunnel can be either another Motorola Netopia® unit or another IPsec/IKE based security product. For VPN you can choose to have
traffic authenticated, encrypted, or both.
When connecting the Motorola Netopia® unit in a telecommuting scenario, the corporate
VPN settings will dictate the settings to be used in the Motorola Netopia® unit. If a parameter has not been specified from the other end of the tunnel, choose the default unless you
fully understand the ramifications of your parameter choice.
set security ipsec option (off) {on | off}
Turns on the SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability. Default is off. See “IPSec” on page 94
for more information.
256
CONFIG Commands
set security ipsec tunnels name "123"
The name of the tunnel can be quoted to allow special characters and embedded spaces.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" tun-enable
(on) {on | off}
This enables this particular tunnel. Currently, one tunnel is supported.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" dest-ext-address
ip-address
Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" dest-int-network ip-address
Specifies the IP address of the destination computer or internal network.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" dest-int-netmask netmask
Specifies the subnet mask of the destination computer or internal network. The subnet
mask specifies which bits of the 32-bit IP address represents network information. The
default subnet mask for most networks is 255.255.255.0 (class C subnet mask).
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" encrypt-protocol
(ESP) { ESP | none }
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" auth-protocol
(ESP) {AH | ESP | none}
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
pre-shared-key-type (hex) {ascii | hex}
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
257
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
pre-shared-key ("") {hex string}
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
Example: 0x1234
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
neg-method {main | aggressive}
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
Note: Aggressive Mode is a little faster, but it does not provide identity protection for negotiations nodes.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
DH-group (1) { 1 | 2 | 5}
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
isakmp-SA-encrypt (DES) { DES | 3DES }
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
ipsec-mtu mtu_value
The Maximum Transmission Unit is a link layer restriction on the maximum number of
bytes of data in a single transmission. The maximum allowable value (also the default) is
1500, and the minimum is 100.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode isakmp-SA-hash
(MD5) {MD5 | SHA1}
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
258
CONFIG Commands
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode PFS-enable
{ off | on }
See page 94 for details about SafeHarbour IPsec tunnel capability.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode invalid-spi-recovery
{ off | on }
Enables the Gateway to re-establish the tunnel if either the Motorola Netopia® Gateway or
the peer gateway is rebooted.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" xauth enable {off | on }
Enables or disables Xauth extensions to IPsec, when IKE-mode neg-method is set to
aggressive. Default is off.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" xauth username username
Sets the Xauth username, if Xauth is enabled.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" xauth password password
Sets the Xauth password, if Xauth is enabled.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" nat-enable { on | off }
Enables or disables NAT on the specified IPsec tunnel. The default is off.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" nat-pat-address ip-address
Specifies the NAT port address translation IP address for the specified IPsec tunnel.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id-type
{ IP-address | Subnet | Hostname | ASCII }
Specifies the NAT local ID type for the specified IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set.
259
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id id_value
Specifies the NAT local ID value as specified in the local-id-type for the specified IPsec
tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set.
☛
Note: If subnet is selected, the following two values are used instead:
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id-addr ip-address
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" local-id-mask ip-mask
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id-type
{ IP-address | Subnet | Hostname | ASCII }
Specifies the NAT remote ID type for the specified IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is
set.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id id_value
Specifies the NAT remote ID value as specified in the remote-id-type for the specified
IPsec tunnel, when Aggressive Mode is set.
☛
Note: If subnet is selected, the following two values are used instead:
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id-addr ip-address
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" remote-id-mask ip-mask
260
CONFIG Commands
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) Settings
The following four IPsec parameters configure the rekeying event.
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
ipsec-soft-mbytes (1000) {1-1000000}
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
ipsec-soft-seconds (82800) {60-1000000}
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
ipsec-hard-mbytes (1200) {1-1000000}
set security ipsec tunnels name "123" IKE-mode
ipsec-hard-seconds (86400) {60-1000000}
• The soft parameters designate when the system begins to negotiate a new key. For
example, after 82800 seconds (23 hours) or 1 Gbyte has been transferred (whichever
comes first) the key will begin to be renegotiated.
• The hard parameters indicate that the renegotiation must be complete or the tunnel will
be disabled. For example, 86400 seconds (24 hours) means that the renegotiation
must be complete within one day.
Both ends of the tunnel set parameters, and typically they will be the same. If they are not
the same, the rekey event will happen when the longest time period expires or when the
largest amount of data has been sent.
261
Stateful Inspection
Stateful inspection options are accessed by the security state-insp tag.
set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn option [ off | on ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ] option [ off | on ]
Sets the stateful inspection option off or on on the specified interface. This option is disabled by default. Stateful inspection prevents unsolicited inbound access when NAT is disabled.
set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn
default-mapping [ off | on ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ]
default-mapping [ off | on ]
Sets stateful inspection default mapping to router option off or on on the specified interface.
set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn tcp-seq-diff
[ 0 - 65535 ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ] tcp-seq-diff
[ 0 - 65535 ]
Sets the acceptable TCP sequence difference on the specified interface. The TCP
sequence number difference maximum allowed value is 65535. If the value of tcp-seq-diff
is 0, it means that this check is disabled.
set security state-insp [ ip-ppp | dsl ] vccn
deny-fragments [ off | on ]
set security state-insp ethernet [ A | B ]
deny-fragments [ off | on ]
Sets whether fragmented packets are allowed to be received or not on the specified interface.
set security state-insp tcp-timeout [ 30 - 65535 ]
Sets the stateful inspection TCP timeout interval, in seconds.
262
CONFIG Commands
set security state-insp udp-timeout [ 30 - 65535 ]
Sets the stateful inspection UDP timeout interval, in seconds.
set security state-insp dos-detect [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the stateful inspection Denial of Service detection feature. If set to
on, the device will monitor packets for Denial of Service (DoS) attack. Offending packets
may be discarded if it is determined to be a DoS attack.
set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# "n"
Allows you to add an entry to the specified list, or, if the list does not exist, creates the list
for the stateful inspection feature. xposed-addr settings only apply if NAT is off.
Example:
set security state-insp xposed-addr exposed-address# (?): 32
32 has been added to the xposed-addr list.
Sets the exposed list address number.
set security state-insp xposed-addr
exposed-address# "n" start-ip ip_address
Sets the exposed list range starting IP address, in dotted quad format.
set security state-insp xposed-addr
exposed-address# "n" end-ip ip_address
Sets the exposed list range ending IP address, in dotted quad format.
32 exposed addresses can be created. The range for exposed address numbers are from
1 through 32.
set security state-insp xposed-addr
263
exposed-address# "n" protocol [ tcp | udp | both | any ]
Sets the protocol for the stateful inspection feature for the exposed address list. Accepted
values for protocol are tcp, udp, both, or any.
If protocol is not any, you can set port ranges:
set security state-insp xposed-addr
exposed-address# "n" start-port [ 1 - 65535 ]
set security state-insp xposed-addr
exposed-address# "n" end-port [ 1 - 65535 ]
264
CONFIG Commands
SNMP Settings
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) lets a network administrator monitor
problems on a network by retrieving settings on remote network devices. The network
administrator typically runs an SNMP management station program on a local host to
obtain information from an SNMP agent such as the Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
set snmp community read name
Adds the specified name to the list of communities associated with the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway. By default, the Motorola Netopia® Gateway is associated with the public community.
set snmp community write name
Adds the specified name to the list of communities associated with the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway.
set snmp community trap name
Adds the specified name to the list of communities associated with the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway.
set snmp trap ip-traps ip-address
Identifies the destination for SNMP trap messages. The ip-address argument is the IP
address of the host acting as an SNMP console.
set snmp sysgroup contact contact_info
Identifies the system contact, such as the name, phone number, beeper number, or email
address of the person responsible for the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. You can enter up to
255 characters for the contact_info argument. You must put the contact_info argument in double-quotes if it contains embedded spaces.
set snmp sysgroup location location_info
Identifies the location, such as the building, floor, or room number, of the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. You can enter up to 255 characters for the location_info argument.
265
You must put the location_info argument in double-quotes if it contains embedded
spaces.
SNMP Notify Type Settings
set snmp notify type [ v1-trap | v2-trap | inform ]
Sets the type of SNMP notifications that the system will generate:
• v1-trap – This selection will generate notifications containing an SNMPv1 Trap Protocol
Data Unit (PDU)
• v2-trap – This selection will generate notifications containing an SNMPv2 Trap PDU
• inform – This selection will generate notifications containing an SNMPv2 InformRequest PDU.
SNMP V3 Settings
SNMP V3 is supported beginning with Firmware Version 7.4.
SNMPv3 supports two users, the Read-Only user and the Read-Write user. The read-only
account will have read-only access to all objects known to the agent, while the read-write
account will have read-write access to all objects known to the agent. SNMPv3 adds the
ability to authenticate and/or encrypt management traffic.
For security reasons, enabling SNMPv3 will disable SNMPv1/v2.
• If SNMPv3 is enabled, the firmware will no longer respond to SNMPv1/SNMPv2 traffic,
nor generate SNMPv1/v2 traps in SNMPv1/SNMPv2 packets. If it receives v1 or v2
packets when v3 is enabled, it behaves as if it does not support v1/v2, and silently discards the incoming packet.
• If SNMPv3 is disabled, the firmware will not respond to SNMPv3 traffic, nor generate
SNMPv3 notifications. The firmware behaves as if it does not support v3 and silently
discards the incoming packet.
set snmp v3 enable [ off | on ]
Turns SNMPv3 off or on.
266
CONFIG Commands
set snmp v3 ro-account security-name string
Adds the specified 1 – 32 character name string as the name of the Read-Only user.
set snmp v3 ro-account security-model [ none | auth | auth+priv ]
Sets the security model for the Read-Only account: none, authentication, or authentication
plus privacy.
• none specifies no authentication or encryption;
• auth (authentication, no encryption) requires a security name and authentication password, and a specified authentication protocol;
• auth+priv (authentication plus privacy DES encryption) requires authentication plus a
privacy password.
set snmp v3 ro-account auth-protocol [ md5 | sha ]
Specifies the authentication protocol for the Read-Only account: md5 (HMAC-MD5 authentication) or sha (HMAC-SHA authentication), if the security model is set to auth or
auth+priv.
set snmp v3 ro-account auth-password
Specifies the authentication password, a 1 – 32 character string, for the Read-Only
account, if the security model is set to auth or auth+priv. You are prompted for a new
password and then to repeat the password. If there is an existing password, the user must
enter the old password, then the new password, and repeat it.
set snmp v3 ro-account priv-password
Specifies the privacy password, a 1 – 32 character string, for the Read-Only account, if the
security model is set to auth+priv. You are prompted for a new password and then to
repeat the password. If there is an existing password, the user must enter the old password, then the new password, and repeat it.
set snmp v3 ro-account localize-keys [ off | on ]
Determines whether or not the generated keys should be localized (hashed) with the
Engine ID for the Read-Only account, if the security model is set to auth+priv.
267
set snmp v3 rw-account security-name string
Adds the specified 1 – 32 character name string as the name of the Read-Write user.
set snmp v3 rw-account security-model [ none | auth | auth+priv ]
Sets the security model for the Read-Write account: none, authentication, or authentication
plus privacy.
• none specifies no authentication or encryption;
• auth (authentication, no encryption) requires a security name and authentication password, and a specified authentication protocol;
• auth+priv (authentication plus privacy DES encryption) requires authentication plus a
privacy password.
set snmp v3 rw-account auth-protocol [ md5 | sha ]
Specifies the authentication protocol for the Read-Write account: md5 (HMAC-MD5 authentication) or sha (HMAC-SHA authentication), if the security model is set to auth or
auth+priv.
set snmp v3 rw-account auth-password
Specifies the authentication password, a 1 – 32 character string, for the Read-Write
account, if the security model is set to auth or auth+priv. You are prompted for a new
password and then to repeat the password. If there is an existing password, the user must
enter the old password, then the new password, and repeat it.
set snmp v3 rw-account priv-password
Specifies the privacy password, a 1 – 32 character string, for the Read-Write account, if the
security model is set to auth+priv. You are prompted for a new password and then to
repeat the password. If there is an existing password, the user must enter the old password, then the new password, and repeat it.
set snmp v3 rw-account localize-keys [ off | on ]
Determines whether or not the generated keys should be localized (hashed) with the
Engine ID for the Read-Write account, if the security model is set to auth+priv.
268
CONFIG Commands
show snmp v3 engine-id
Displays the router’s SNMP Engine ID. This is not editable.
System Settings
You can configure system settings to assign a name to your Motorola Netopia® Gateway
and to specify what types of messages you want the diagnostic log to record.
set system name name
Specifies the name of your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. Each Motorola Netopia® Gateway
is assigned a name as part of its factory initialization. The default name for a Motorola
Netopia® Gateway consists of the word “Netopia-3000/XXX” where “XXX” is the serial
number of the device; for example, Netopia-3000/9437188. A system name can be 1 –
255 characters long. Once you have assigned a name to your Motorola Netopia® Gateway,
you can enter that name in the Address text field of your browser to open a connection to
your Motorola Netopia® Gateway.
☛
NOTE:
Some broadband cable-oriented Service Providers use the System Name as
an important identification and support parameter. If your Gateway is part of
this type of network, do NOT alter the System Name unless specifically
instructed by your Service Provider.
set system diagnostic-level
{ off | low | medium | high | alerts | failures }
Specifies the types of log messages you want the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to record.
All messages with a level equal to or greater than the level you specify are recorded. For
example, if you specify set system diagnostic-level medium, the diagnostic log will retain
medium-level informational messages, alerts, and failure messages. Specifying off turns
off logging.
Use the following guidelines:
• low - Low-level informational messages or greater; includes trivial status messages.
269
• medium - Medium-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages
that can help monitor network traffic.
• high - High-level informational messages or greater; includes status messages that
may be significant but do not constitute errors. The default.
• alerts - Warnings or greater; includes recoverable error conditions and useful operator information.
• failures - Failures; includes messages describing error conditions that may not be
recoverable.
270
CONFIG Commands
set system ftp-server option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables a simple FTP server in the Gateway. If enabled, the Gateway will
accept binary embedded software images (‘.bin’) files or command line configuration files.
Supported FTP commands
MODE
(data transfer mode (only Streaming supported)
NOOP
(send back ok)
PORT
(specify client address:port for data)
QUIT
(quit)
STOR
(send file to FTP server)
SYST
(get system info about FTP server)
TYPE
(set data representation type, ASCII and IMAGE (BIN) only supported)
USER
(send username for authentication)
set system log-size [ 10240... 65536 ]
Specifies a size for the system log. The most recent entries are posted to the beginning of
the log. When the log becomes full, the oldest entries are dropped. The default is 30000.
set system persistent-log [ off | on ]
When set to on, causes the log information to be kept in flash memory.
set system idle-timeout { telnet [ 1...120 ] | http [ 1... 120 ] }
Specifies a timeout period of inactivity for telnet or HTTP access to the Gateway, after
which a user must re-login to the Gateway. Defaults are 5 minutes for HTTP and 15 minutes for telnet.
set system username { administrator name | user name }
Specifies the usernames for the administrative user – the default is admin; and a nonadministrative user – the default is user.
271
set system password { admin | user }
Specifies the administrator or user password for a Motorola Netopia® Gateway. When you
enter the set system password command, you are prompted to enter the old password (if any) and new password. You are prompted to repeat the new password to verify
that you entered it correctly the first time. To prevent anyone from observing the password
you enter, characters in the old and new passwords are not displayed as you type them.
For security, you cannot use the “step” method to set the system password.
A password can be as many as 8 characters. Passwords are case-sensitive.
Passwords go into effect immediately. You do not have to restart the Motorola Netopia®
Gateway for the password to take effect. Assigning an administrator or user password to a
Motorola Netopia® Gateway does not affect communications through the device.
set system heartbeat option { on | off }
protocol [ udp | tcp ]
port-client [ 1 - 65535 ]
ip-server [ ip_address | dns_name ]
port-server [ 1 - 65535 ]
url-server ("server_name")
number [ 1 – 1073741823 ]
interval (00:00:00:20)
sleep (00:00:30:00)
contact-email ("string@domain_name")
location ("string"):
The heartbeat setting is used in conjunction with the configuration server to broadcast contact and location information about your Gateway. You can specify the protocol, port, IP-,
port-, and URL-server.
• The interval setting specifies the broadcast update frequency. Part of sequence control. The interval is the spacing between heartbeats, in d:h:m:s.
• The contact-email setting is a quote-enclosed text string giving an email address for
the Gateway’s administrator.
• The location setting is a text string allowing you to specify your geographical or other
location, such as “Secaucus, NJ.”
• The number setting is part of the sequence control. This is the number of heartbeats
to send, at each “interval”, before sleeping. For example, if this is 20, in the above lay-
272
CONFIG Commands
out, each heartbeat sequence will send out a total 20 heartbeats, spaced at 30 second
intervals, and then sleep for 30 minutes. So to have the Gateway send out packets
“forever”, this number can be set very high. If it is 1440 and the interval is 1 minute,
say, the heartbeat will go out every minute for 1440 minutes, or one day, before sleeping.
• The sleep setting is part of sequence control. This is the time to sleep before starting
another heartbeat sequence, in d:h:m:s.
set system ntp
option [ off | on ]:
server-address (north-america.pool.ntp.org)
alt-server-address (pool.ntp.org):
time-zone [ -12 - 12 ]
update-period (60) [ 1 - 65535 ]:
daylight-savings [ off | on ]
Specifies the NTP server address, time zone, and how often the Gateway should check the
time from the NTP server. The NTP server-address and alt-server-address can be
entered as DNS names as well as IP addresses. NTP time-zone of 0 is GMT time; options
are -12 through 12 (+/- 1 hour increments from GMT time). update-period specifies how
often, in minutes, the Gateway should update the clock. daylight-savings specifies
whether daylight savings time is in effect; it defaults to off.
set system zerotouch option [ on | off ]
Enables or disables the Zero Touch option.
Zero Touch refers to automatic configuration of your Motorola Netopia® Gateway. The
Motorola Netopia® Gateway has default settings such that initial connection to the Internet will succeed. If the zerotouch option is set to on, HTTP requests to any destination IP
address except the IP address(es) of the configured redirection URL(s) will access a redirection server. DNS traffic will not be blocked. Other traffic from the LAN to all destinations
will be dropped.
set system zerotouch redirect-url redirection-URL
Specifies the URL(s) of the desired redirection server(s) when the zerotouch option is set
to on. URLs may be a maximum of 192 characters long, and may be in any of the following
forms:
http://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath:port
273
http://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath
https://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath:port
https://<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath
<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath:port
<domain-name OR IP address>/optionalPath
If the port number is omitted, port 80 will be assumed.
Syslog
set system syslog option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables system syslog feature. If syslog option is on, the following commands
are available:
set system syslog host-nameip [ ip_address | hostname ]
Specifies the syslog server’s address either in dotted decimal format or as a DNS name up
to 64 characters.
set system syslog log-facility [ local0 ... local7 ]
Sets the UNIX syslog Facility. Acceptable values are local0 through local7.
set system syslog log-violations [ off | on ]
Specifies whether violations are logged or ignored.
set system syslog log-accepted [ off | on ]
Specifies whether acceptances are logged or ignored.
set system syslog log-attempts [ off | on ]
Specifies whether connection attempts are logged or ignored.
274
CONFIG Commands
Default syslog installation procedure
1. Access the router via telnet from the private LAN.
DHCP server is enabled on the LAN by default.
2.
The product’s stateful inspection feature must be enabled in order to
examine TCP, UDP and ICMP packets destined for the router or the private
hosts.
This can be done by entering the CONFIG interface.
• Type config
• Type the command to enable stateful inspection
set security state-insp ip-ppp vcc1 option on
• Type the command to enable the router to drop fragmented packets
3.
set security state-insp ip-ppp vcc1 deny-fragments on
Enabling syslog:
• Type config
• Type the command to enable syslog
set system syslog option on
• Set the IP Address of the syslog host
set system syslog host-nameip <ip-addr>
(example: set system syslog host-nameip 10.3.1.1)
• Enable/change the options you require
4.
set system syslog
set system syslog
set system syslog
set system syslog
Set NTP parameters
• Type config
log-facility local1
log-violations on
log-accepted on
log-attempts on
• Set the time-zone – Default is 0 or GMT
set system ntp time-zone <zone>
(example: set system ntp time-zone –8)
• Set NTP server-address if necessary (default is 204.152.184.72)
set system ntp server-address <ip-addr>
(example:
set system ntp server-address 204.152.184.73)
• Set alternate server address
275
5.
set system ntp alt-server-address <ip-addr>
Type the command to save the configuration
• Type save
• Exit the configuration interface by typing
exit
• Restart the router by typing
restart
The router will reboot with the new configuration in effect.
276
CONFIG Commands
Wireless Settings (supported models)
set wireless option ( on | off )
Administratively enables or disables the wireless interface.
set wireless network-id ssid { network_name }
Specifies the wireless network id for the Gateway. A unique ssid is generated for each
Gateway. You must set your wireless clients to connect to this exact id, which can be
changed to any 32-character string.
set wireless auto-channel mode { off | at-startup | continuous }
Specifies the wireless AutoChannel Setting for 802.11G models. AutoChannel is a feature
that allows the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to determine the best channel to broadcast
automatically. For details, see “AutoChannel Setting” on page 128.
set wireless default-channel { 1...14 }
Specifies the wireless 2.4GHz sub channel on which the wireless Gateway will operate. For
US operation, this is limited to channels 1–11. Other countries vary; for example, Japan is
channel 14 only. The default channel in the US is 6. Channel selection can have a significant impact on performance, depending on other wireless activity in proximity to this AP.
Channel selection is not necessary at the clients; clients will scan the available channels
and look for APs using the same ssid as the client.
set wireless network-id closed-system { on | off }
When this setting is enabled, a client must know the ssid in order to connect or even see
the wireless access point. When disabled, a client may scan for available wireless access
points and will see this one. Enable this setting for greater security. The default is on.
277
set wireless mode { both-b-and-g | b-only | g-only }
Specifies the wireless operating mode for connecting wireless clients: both-b-and-g, bonly, or g-only, and locks the Gateway in that mode.
☛
NOTE:
If you choose to limit the operating mode to B or G only, clients using the
mode you excluded will not be able to connect.
set wireless multi-ssid option { on | off }
Enables or disables the multi-ssid feature which allows you to add additional network
identifiers (SSIDs or Network Names) for your wireless network. When enabled, you can
specify up to three additional SSIDs with separate privacy settings for each. See below.
set wireless multi-ssid {second-ssid | third-ssid | fourth-ssid } name
Specifies a descriptive name for each SSID. when multi-ssid option is set to on.
set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-privacy { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-privacy { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-privacy { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
Specifies the type of privacy enabled on multiple SSIDs when multi-ssid option is set to
on. off = no privacy; WEP = WEP encryption; WPA-PSK = Wireless Protected Access/PreShared Key; WPA-802.1x = Wireless Protected Access/802.1x authentication. See “Wireless Privacy Settings” on page 284 for more information.
☛
NOTE:
WEP is supported on only one SSID at a time, and will not be available if
another SSID already has it configured.
278
CONFIG Commands
set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-wpa-ver { all | WPA1-only |
WPA2-only }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-wpa-ver { all | WPA1-only |
WPA2-only }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-wpa-ver { all | WPA1-only |
WPA2-only }
Specifies the type of WPA version enabled on multiple SSIDs when multi-ssid option is
set to on and privacy is set to WPA-PSK. See “Wireless Privacy Settings” on page 284 for
more information.
set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-psk { string }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-psk { string }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-psk { string }
Specifies a WPA passphrase for the multiple SSIDs, when second-, third-, or fourth-ssidprivacy is set to WPA-PSK. The Pre Shared Key is a passphrase shared between the
Gateway and the clients and is used to generate dynamically changing keys. The passphrase can be 8 – 63 characters. It is recommended to use at least 20 characters for best
security.
set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-weplen [ 40/64bit | 128bit | 256bit ]
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-weplen [ 40/64bit | 128bit | 256bit ]
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-weplen [ 40/64bit | 128bit | 256bit ]
Specifies the WEP key length for the multiple SSIDs, when second-, third-, or fourthssid-privacy is set to WEP. 40bit encryption is equivalent to 64bit encryption. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption and the more difficult it is to break the encryption.
set wireless multi-ssid second-ssid-wepkey { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless multi-ssid third-ssid-wepkey { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless multi-ssid fourth-ssid-wepkey { hexadecimal digits }
Specifies a WEP key for the multiple SSIDs, when second-, third-, or fourth-ssid-privacy
is set to WEP. For 40/64bit encryption, you need 10 digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58
digits for 256bit WEP. Valid hexadecimal characters are 0 – 9, a – f.
279
set wireless no-bridging [ off | on ]
When set to on, this will block wireless clients from communicating with other wireless clients on the LAN side of the Gateway.
set wireless tx-power [ full | medium | fair | low | minimal ]
Sets the wireless transmit power, scaling down the router's wireless transmit coverage by
lowering its radio power output. Default is full power. Transmit power settings are useful in
large venues with multiple wireless routers where you want to reuse channels. Since there
are only three non-overlapping channels in the 802.11 spectrum, it helps to size the Gateway’s cell to match the location. This allows you to install a router to cover a small “hole”
without conflicting with other routers nearby.
280
CONFIG Commands
Wireless Multi-media (WMM) Settings
Router EDCA Parameters (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access) govern wireless data
from your Gateway to the client; Client EDCA Parameters govern wireless data from the
client to your Gateway.
set wireless wmm option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables wireless multi-media settings option, which allows you to fine tune WiFi
Multimedia Quality of Service (QoS) by transmitting data depending on Diffserv priority settings. These priorities are mapped into four Access Categories (AC), in increasing order of
priority: Background (BK), Best Effort (BE), Video (VI), and Voice (VO). It requires WiFi Multimedia-capable clients, usually a separate feature enabled at the client.
• aifs: (Arbitration Interframe Spacing) the wait time in milliseconds for data frames.
Valid values are: 1 – 255
• cwmin: (Minimum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range for
determining initial random backoff. The value you choose must be lower than cwmax.
Valid values are: 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, or 511.
• cwmax: (Maximum Contention Window) upper limit in milliseconds of the range of
determining final random backoff. The value you choose must be higher than cwmin.
Valid values are: 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, or 1023.
• txoplimit: Time interval in microseconds that clients may initiate transmissions.
Valid values are: 0 – 9999.
☛
NOTE:
It is not recommended that you modify these settings without direct knowledge or instructions to do so. Modifying these settings inappropriately could
seriously degrade network performance.
set wireless wmm router-edca voice { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca voice { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca voice { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM voice parameters.
281
set wireless wmm router-edca video { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca video { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca video { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM video parameters.
set wireless wmm router-edca best-effort { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca best-effort { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca best-effort { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM best effort parameters.
set wireless wmm router-edca background { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm router-edca background { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm router-edca background { cwmax value }
Sets values for Gateway WMM background parameters.
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca voice { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM voice parameters.
set wireless wmm client-edca video { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca video { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca video { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca video { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM video parameters.
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca best-effort { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM best effort parameters.
282
CONFIG Commands
set wireless wmm client-edca background { aifs 1... 255 }
set wireless wmm client-edca background { cwmin value }
set wireless wmm client-edca background { cwmax value }
set wireless wmm client-edca background { txoplimit 0... 9999 }
Sets values for client WMM background parameters.
283
Wireless Privacy Settings
set wireless network-id privacy option { off | WEP | WPA-PSK |
WPA-802.1x }
Specifies the type of privacy enabled on the wireless LAN. off = no privacy; WEP = WEP
encryption; WPA-PSK = Wireless Protected Access/Pre-Shared Key; WPA-802.1x = Wireless
Protected Access/802.1x authentication. See “Privacy” on page 126 for a discussion of
these options.
WPA provides Wireless Protected Access, the most secure option for your wireless network. This mechanism provides the best data protection and access control. PSK requires
a Pre-Shared Key; 802.1x requires a RADIUS server for authentication.
WEP is Wired Equivalent Privacy, a method of encrypting data between the wireless Gateway and its clients. It is strongly recommended to turn this on as it is the primary way to
protect your network and data from intruders. Note that 40bit is the same as 64bit and will
work with either type of wireless client. The default is off.
A single key is selected (see default-key) for encryption of outbound/transmitted packets.
The WEP-enabled client must have the identical key, of the same length, in the identical
slot (1..4) as the wireless Gateway, in order to successfully receive and decrypt the
packet. Similarly, the client also has a ‘default’ key that it uses to encrypt its transmissions. In order for the wireless Gateway to receive the client’s data, it must likewise have
the identical key, of the same length, in the same slot. For simplicity, a wireless Gateway
and its clients need only enter, share, and use the first key.
set wireless network-id privacy pre-shared-key string
The Pre Shared Key is a passphrase shared between the Router and the clients and is
used to generate dynamically changing keys, when WPA-PSK is selected or enabled. The
passphrase can be 8 – 63 characters. It is recommended to use at least 20 characters for
best security.
set wireless network-id privacy default-keyid { 1...4 }
Specifies which WEP encryption key (of 4) the wireless Gateway will use to transmit data.
The client must have an identical matching key, in the same numeric slot, in order to successfully decode. Note that a client allows you to choose which of its keys it will use to
transmit. Therefore, you must have an identical key in the same numeric slot on the Gateway.
284
CONFIG Commands
For simplicity, it is easiest to have both the Gateway and the client transmit with the same
key. The default is 1.
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key1-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key2-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key3-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key4-length
{40/64bit, 128bit, 256bit}
Selects the length of each encryption key. 40bit encryption is equivalent to 64bit encryption. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption and the more difficult it is to break the
encryption.
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key1 { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key2 { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key3 { hexadecimal digits }
set wireless network-id privacy encryption-key4 { hexadecimal digits }
The encryption keys. Enter keys using hexadecimal digits. For 40/64bit encryption, you
need 10 digits; 26 digits for 128bit, and 58 digits for 256bit WEP. Valid hexadecimal characters are 0 – 9, a – f.
Example 40bit key: 02468ACE02.
Example 128bit key: 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789.
Example 256bit key:
592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F21A09C.
You must set at least one of these keys, indicated by the default-keyid.
Wireless MAC Address Authorization Settings
set wireless mac-auth option { on | off }
Enabling this feature limits the MAC addresses that are allowed to access the LAN as well
as the WAN to specified MAC (hardware) addresses.
285
set wireless mac-auth wrlss-MAC-list mac-address
MAC-address_string
Enters a new MAC address into the MAC address authorization table. The format for an
Ethernet MAC address is six hexadecimal values between 00 and FF inclusive separated by
colons or dashes (e.g., 00:00:C5:70:00:04).
set wireless mac-auth wrlss-MAC-list mac-address
“MAC-address_string” allow-access { on | off }
Designates whether the MAC address is enabled or not for wireless network access. Disabled MAC addresses cannot be used for access until enabled.
286
CONFIG Commands
RADIUS Server Settings
set radius radius-name "server_name_string"
Specifies the default RADIUS server name or IP address.
set radius radius-secret "shared_secret"
Specifies the RADIUS secret key used by this server. The shared secret should have the
same characteristics as a normal password.
set radius alt-radius-name "server_name_string"
Specifies an alternate RADIUS server name or IP address to be used if the primary server
is unreachable.
set radius alt-radius-secret "shared_secret"
Specifies the secret key used by the alternate RADIUS server.
set radius radius-port port_number
Specifies the port on which the RADIUS server is listening. The default value is 1812.
287
VLAN Settings
You can create up to 8 VLANs, and you can also restrict any VLAN, and the computers on it,
from administering the Gateway. See “VLAN” on page 106 for more information.
set vlan name name
Sets the descriptive name for the VLAN. If no name is specified, displays a selection list of
node names to select for editing. Once a new VLAN name is specified, presents the list of
VLAN characteristics to define.
set vlan name name type [ by-port | global ]
Specifies VLAN type: by-port or global. Default is by-port.
set vlan name name id VID
Specifies VLAN id (VID), when type is set to global. The numerical range of possible VIDs
is 1 - 4094. (A VID of zero (0) is permitted on the Ethernet WAN port only.)
set vlan name name admin-restricted [ off | on ]
Turns admin-restricted off or on. Default is off. If you select on, administrative access to
the Gateway is blocked from the specified VLAN.
set vlan name name seg-pbits [ 0 - 7 ]
Specifies the 802.1p priority bit. If you set this to a value greater than 0, all packets of this
VLAN with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will be re-marked to this priority.
set vlan name name ports port option [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the Gateway’s physical Ethernet, USB or VCC port or wireless SSID for
the specified VLAN.
288
CONFIG Commands
set vlan name name ports port tag [ off | on ]
If set to on, packets transmitted from this port through this VLAN must be tagged with the
VLAN VID. Packets received through this port destined for this VLAN must be tagged with
the VLAN VID by the source. The tag option is only available on global type ports.
set vlan name name ports port priority [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the priority for the port assigned to the specified VLAN allowing
packet prioritization based on any 802.1p priority bits in the VLAN header to prioritize packets within the Gateway’s internal queues, according to DiffServ priority mapping rules.
set vlan name name ports port promote [ off | on ]
Enables or disables the promote setting allowing writing any 802.1p priority bits into the
IP-TOS header bit field for received IP packets on this port destined for this VLAN. Write any
IP-TOS priority bits into the 802.1p priority bit field for tagged IP packets transmitted from
this port for this VLAN. All mappings between Ethernet 802.1p and IP-TOS are made via
diffserv dscp-map settings.
set vlan name name ports port port-pbits [ 0 - 7 ]
Specifies the 802.1p priority bit for this port associated with the specified VLAN. If you set
this to a value greater than 0, all packets of this port with unmarked priority bits (pbits) will
be re-marked to this priority.
set vlan name name ip-interface ip_interface
Associates this VLAN with the specified IP interface. By default the ip-vcc1 and ip-eth-a
interfaces are available, but others may be defined.
set vlan name name inter-vlan-routing [ group-1... group-8 ] [ off | on ]
When set to on, inter-vlan-routing allows VLANs in the specified group to route traffic to
the others; ungrouped VLANs cannot route traffic to each other.
You must save the changes, exit out of configuration mode, and restart the Gateway for the
changes to take effect.
289
Example 1:
• A simple example using the “Step” method – Navigate to the VLAN item:
Netopia-3000/9437188 (top)>> vlan
Netopia-3000/9437188 (vlan)>> set
vlan
(vlan) node list ...
Select (name) node to modify from list,
or enter new (name) to create.
vlan name (?): vlan1
(vlan1) has been added to the (vlan) list
name "vlan1"
type (by-port) [ by-port | global ]: by-port
admin-restricted (off) [ off | on ]: off
seg-pbits (0) [ 0 - 7 ]: 0
ports
• At this point you have created a VLAN. It is called vlan1, without any admin restrictions.
• Next, add the port eth0.1 port to this VLAN:
ports
eth0.1
option (off) [ off | on ]: on
priority (off) [ off | on ]: on
promote (off) [ off | on ]: on
port-pbits (0) [ 0 - 7 ]: 1
eth0.2
option (off) [ off | on ]:
eth0.3
option (off) [ off | on ]:
eth0.4
option (off) [ off | on ]:
ssid1
option (off) [ off | on ]:
vcc1
option (off) [ off | on ]:
• Assign an IP interface:
ip-vcc1
option (off) [ off | on ]:
ip-eth-a
option (off) [ off | on ]: on
ipsec-mgmt1
option (off) [ off | on ]:
Netopia-3000/9437188 (vlan)>>
290
CONFIG Commands
Example 2:
• An example of a “Triple-Play” setup:
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"LanPorts"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
"Voip_217"
type by-port
admin-restricted off
seg-pbits 0
ports eth0.1 option off
ports eth0.2 option on
ports eth0.2 priority off
ports eth0.2 promote off
ports eth0.2 port-pbits 0
ports eth0.3 option on
ports eth0.3 priority off
ports eth0.3 promote off
ports eth0.3 port-pbits 0
ports eth0.4 option on
ports eth0.4 priority off
ports eth0.4 promote off
ports eth0.4 port-pbits 0
ports ssid1 option on
ports ssid1 priority off
ports ssid1 promote off
ports ssid1 port-pbits 0
ports eth1 option off
ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option on
inter-vlan-routing group-1 on
inter-vlan-routing group-2 off
inter-vlan-routing group-3 off
inter-vlan-routing group-4 off
type global
id 217
admin-restricted off
seg-pbits 7
ports eth0.1 option off
ports eth0.2 option off
ports eth0.3 option off
ports eth0.4 option off
ports ssid1 option off
ports eth1 option on
ports eth1 tag on
ports eth1 priority off
ports eth1 promote off
ports eth1 port-pbits 0
ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option on
ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off
291
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
292
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
"Voip_217" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off
"Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-1 on
"Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off
"Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off
"Voip_217" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off
"PPPoE_11" type global
"PPPoE_11" id 11
"PPPoE_11" admin-restricted off
"PPPoE_11" seg-pbits 0
"PPPoE_11" ports eth0.1 option off
"PPPoE_11" ports eth0.2 option off
"PPPoE_11" ports eth0.3 option off
"PPPoE_11" ports eth0.4 option off
"PPPoE_11" ports ssid1 option off
"PPPoE_11" ports eth1 option on
"PPPoE_11" ports eth1 tag on
"PPPoE_11" ports eth1 priority off
"PPPoE_11" ports eth1 promote off
"PPPoE_11" ports eth1 port-pbits 0
"PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option on
"PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off
"PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off
"PPPoE_11" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off
"PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-1 on
"PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off
"PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off
"PPPoE_11" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off
"Mgmt_2017" type global
"Mgmt_2017" id 2017
"Mgmt_2017" admin-restricted off
"Mgmt_2017" seg-pbits 3
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.1 option off
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.2 option off
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.3 option off
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth0.4 option off
"Mgmt_2017" ports ssid1 option off
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 option on
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 tag on
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 priority off
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 promote off
"Mgmt_2017" ports eth1 port-pbits 0
"Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off
"Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off
"Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option on
"Mgmt_2017" ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off
"Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-1 off
"Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-2 off
"Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-3 off
"Mgmt_2017" inter-vlan-routing group-4 off
CONFIG Commands
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
name
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
"Video_31"
type global
id 31
admin-restricted off
seg-pbits 5
ports eth0.1 option on
ports eth0.1 tag off
ports eth0.1 priority off
ports eth0.1 promote off
ports eth0.1 port-pbits 0
ports eth0.2 option off
ports eth0.3 option off
ports eth0.4 option off
ports ssid1 option off
ports eth1 option on
ports eth1 tag on
ports eth1 priority off
ports eth1 promote off
ports eth1 port-pbits 0
ip-interfaces ip-ppp-a option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-b option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-c option off
ip-interfaces ip-eth-a option off
inter-vlan-routing group-1 off
inter-vlan-routing group-2 off
inter-vlan-routing group-3 off
inter-vlan-routing group-4 off
You must save the changes, exit out of configuration mode, and restart the Gateway for the
changes to take effect.
293
VoIP settings
(supported models only)
Voice-over-IP (VoIP) refers to the ability to make voice telephone calls over the Internet. This
differs from traditional phone calls that use the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN). VoIP calls use an Internet protocol, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), to transmit
sound over a network or the Internet in the form of data packets. Certain Motorola Netopia® Gateway models have two separate voice ports for connecting telephone handsets.
These models support VoIP. If your Gateway is a VoIP model, you can configure the VoIP
features.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-option [ off | on ]
Turns SIP on or off for the specified phone. Default is off.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-proxy-server [ server_name | ip_address ]
Specifies the SIP proxy server for the specified phone by fully qualified server name or IP
address.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-proxy-server-domain domain_name
Specifies the SIP proxy server domain name or IP address for the specified phone.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-proxy-server-transport [ UDP | TCP | TLS ]
Specifies the SIP proxy server transport protocol for the specified phone. Default is UDP.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server
[ server_name | ip_address ]
Specifies the SIP registration server for the specified phone by fully qualified server name
or IP address.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-registrar-setting
sip-registrar-server-transport [ UDP | TCP | TLS ]
Specifies the SIP registration server transport protocol for the specified phone. Default is
UDP.
294
CONFIG Commands
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-registrar-setting sip-expires-time
[ 0 - 65535 ]
Specifies the SIP registration server time-out duration from 0 – 65535 seconds for the
specified phone. Default is 3600 (1 hour).
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-out-proxy-server
[ server_name | ip_address ]
Specifies the SIP outbound proxy server for the specified phone by fully qualified server
name or IP address.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-user-display-name name
Specifies the user name that is displayed on the web UI Home page, or other caller-id displays for the specified phone.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-user-name username
Specifies the user name that authenticates the user to SIP for the specified phone.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-user-password password
Specifies the password that authenticates the user to SIP for the specified phone.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] auth-id string
Specifies the authorization ID that authenticates the user to SIP for the specified phone.
Most SIP Servers expect this to be the username itself but some may use auth-id.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G711A priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the alaw codec, the common analog voice encoding method used outside North America.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G711U priority
295
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the ulaw codec, the common analog voice encoding method used in
North America.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G729A priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G729 annex A codec, the common analog voice compression
implementation used in North America.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_16 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-16 codec, a common audio media type implementation at
16 kbit/s.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_24 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-24 codec, a common audio media type implementation at
24 kbit/s.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_32 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-32 codec, a common audio media type implementation at
32 kbit/s.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] codec G726_40 priority
[ 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none ]
Assigns a priority to the G726-40 codec, a common audio media type implementation at
40 kbit/s.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting sip-dtmf-mode
[ inband | rfc2833 | info ]
sip-dtmf-mode – sets the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Mode:
296
CONFIG Commands
• inband: sends the DTMF digits as a normal inband tone.
• rfc2833: sends the DTMF digits as an event as part of the RTP packet header
information.
• info: sends the DTMF digits in the SIP INFO message.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting sip-end-of-dial-marker
[ off | on ]
sip-end-of-dial-marker – turns an “end of dial” (#) signal that indicates that the dialed
number is complete on or off.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-forwarding-all-option [ off | on ]
call-forwarding-all-option – turns unconditional call forwarding on or off.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-forwarding-all-number phone_number
call-forwarding-all-number – specifies the number to which calls are to be forwarded
when call-forwarding-all-option is on.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-forwarding-on-busy-option [ off | on ]
call-forwarding-on-busy-option – turns call forwarding when the line is busy on or off.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option [ off | on ]
call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option – turns call forwarding when there is no answer
on or off.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-forwarding-on-no-answer-number phone_number
call-forwarding-on-no-answer-number – specifies the number to which calls are to be
forwarded when call-forwarding-on-no-answer-option is on.
297
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-waiting-option [ off | on ]
call-waiting-option – enables or disables call waiting.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
call-conferencing-option [ off | on ]
call-conferencing-option – enables or disables 3-way call conferencing.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
subscribe-do-not-disturb-option [ off | on ]
subscribe-do-not-disturb-option – enables or disables option to prevent the phone from
ringing.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting call-feature
subscribe-mwi-option [ off | on ]
subscribe-mwi-option – if set to on, the Message Waiting Indicator is enabled when new voice
mail is received.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-option
[ echo-off | echo-on | echo-on-nlp | echo-on-cng-nlp ]
echo-option – specifies under what conditions the system invokes or disables echo cancellation. Default is echo-on-cng-nlp (Comfort Noise Generation with non-linear processor).
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings
echo-start-attenuation [ 0 - 65535 ]
echo-start-attenuation – specifies the minimum attenuation level at which to invoke echo
cancellation. Default is 8192.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings
298
CONFIG Commands
echo-max-attenuation [ 0 - 65535 ]
echo-max-attenuation – specifies the maximum attenuation level at which to invoke echo
cancellation. Default is 16384.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings
echo-tail-length [ 0 - 65535 ]
echo-tail-length – specifies the duration of an echo tail required to invoke cancellation.
Default is 0.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings
vad-option [ off | on ]
vad-option – turns Voice Activity Detection on or off. Default is off.
set voip phone [ 0 | 1 ] sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings
vad-setting [ vad-cn | vad-std-sid | vad-suppress-sid ]
When vad-option is set to on:
• vad-cn – enables Voice Activity Detection/Comfort Noise Generation. When speech is
not present, the CNG algorithm generates a noise signal at the level sent from the
transmit side.
• vad-std-sid – enables Voice Activity Detection with standard Silence Insertion Descriptor support.
• vad-suppress-sid – enables Voice Activity Detection but suppresses standard Silence
Insertion Descriptor support.
Example
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
voip
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
phone:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
sip-option on
sip-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
sip-proxy-server-domain ""
sip-proxy-server-transport UDP
sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server "10.3.1.129"
sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server-transport UDP
sip-registrar-setting sip-expires-time 3600
sip-out-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
sip-user-display-name "4004"
sip-user-name "4004"
sip-user-password "4004"
299
set voip phone: 0 auth-id "4004"
set voip phone: 0 codec G711A priority 1
set voip phone: 0 codec G711U priority 2
set voip phone: 0 codec G729A priority 3
set voip phone: 0 codec G726_16 priority 4
set voip phone: 0 codec G726_24 priority 5
set voip phone: 0 codec G726_32 priority 6
set voip phone: 0 codec G726_40 priority 7
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting sip-dtmf-mode rfc2833
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting sip-end-of-dial-marker off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-alloption off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-busyoption off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-noanswer-option off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-waiting-option off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-conferencing-option
off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-do-notdisturb-option off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-mwi-option off
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-option echo-on-cngnlp
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-start-attenuation
8192
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-max-attenuation
16384
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-tail-length 0
set voip phone: 0 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings vad-option off
set voip phone: 1 sip-option on
set voip phone: 1 sip-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 1 sip-proxy-server-domain ""
set voip phone: 1 sip-proxy-server-transport UDP
set voip phone: 1 sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 1 sip-registrar-setting sip-registrar-server-transport UDP
set voip phone: 1 sip-registrar-setting sip-expires-time 3600
set voip phone: 1 sip-out-proxy-server "10.3.1.129"
set voip phone: 1 sip-user-display-name "4005"
set voip phone: 1 sip-user-name "4005"
set voip phone: 1 sip-user-password "4005"
set voip phone: 1 auth-id "4005"
set voip phone: 1 codec G711A priority 1
set voip phone: 1 codec G711U priority 2
set voip phone: 1 codec G729A priority 3
set voip phone: 1 codec G726_16 priority 4
set voip phone: 1 codec G726_24 priority 5
set voip phone: 1 codec G726_32 priority 6
set voip phone: 1 codec G726_40 priority 7
300
CONFIG Commands
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting sip-dtmf-mode rfc2833
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting sip-end-of-dial-marker off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-alloption off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-busyoption off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-forwarding-on-noanswer-option off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-waiting-option off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature call-conferencing-option
off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-do-notdisturb-option off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting call-feature subscribe-mwi-option off
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-option echo-on-cngnlp
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-start-attenuation
8192
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-max-attenuation
16384
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings echo-tail-length 0
set voip phone: 1 sip-advanced-setting dsp-settings vad-option off
UPnP settings
set upnp option [ on | off ]
PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateway’s WAN IP address, and automatically create NAT
port maps. This means that applications that support UPnP, and are used with a UPnPenabled Motorola Netopia® Gateway, will not need application layer gateway support on
the Motorola Netopia® Gateway to work through NAT. The default is on.
You can disable UPnP, if you are not using any UPnP devices or applications.
set upnp log [ off | on ]
Enables or disables UPnP logging.
set upnp read-only [ off | on ]
Enables or disables
301
DSL Forum settings
TR-064 is a LAN-side DSL CPE configuration specification and TR-069 is a WAN-side DSL
CPE Management specification.
TR-064
DSL Forum LAN Side CPE Configuration (TR-064) is an extension of UPnP. It defines more
services to locally manage the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. While UPnP allows open
access to configure the Gateway's features, TR-064 requires a password to execute any
command that changes the Gateway's configuration.
set dslf-lanmgmt option [ off | on ]
Turns TR-064 LAN side management services on or off. The default is on.
TR-069
DSL Forum CPE WAN Management Protocol (TR-069) provides services similar to UPnP and
TR-064. The communication between the Motorola Netopia® Gateway and management
agent in UPnP and TR-064 is strictly over the LAN, whereas the communication in TR-069 is
over the WAN link for some features and over the LAN for others. TR-069 allows a remote
Auto-Config Server (ACS) to provision and manage the Motorola Netopia® Gateway. TR-069
protects sensitive data on the Gateway by not advertising its presence, and by password
protection.
set dslf-cpewan option [ off | on ]
set dslf-cpewan acs-url "acs_url:port_number"
set dslf-cpewan acs-user-name “acs_username”
set dslf-cpewan acs-user-password “acs_password”
Turns TR-069 WAN side management services on or off. For 3300-Series Gateways, the
default is off; for 2200-Series Gateways, the default is on. If TR-069 WAN side management services are enabled, specifies the auto-config server URL and port number. A username and password must also be supplied, if TR-069 is enabled.
302
CONFIG Commands
The auto-config server is specified by URL and port number. The format for the ACS URL is
as follows:
http://some_url.com:port_number
or
http://123.45.678.910:port_number
On units that support SSL, the format for the ACS URL can also be:
https://some_url.com:port_number
or
https://123.45.678.910:port_number
303
Backup IP Gateway Settings
The purpose of Backup is to provide a recovery mechanism in the event that the primary
connection fails. A failure can be either line loss, for example by central site switch failure
or physical cable breakage, or loss of end-to-end connectivity. Detection of one of these
failures causes the Gateway to switch from using the primary DSL WAN connection to an
alternate gateway on the Ethernet LAN. In the event of a loss of primary connectivity you
have the option of switching back to the primary circuit automatically once it has recovered
its connection.
A typical application would be to have a LAN connection from your Gateway to another
Gateway that has, for example, another DSL modem or Gateway connection to the Internet,
and designating the second gateway as the backup gateway. Should the primary WAN
connection fail, traffic would be automatically redirected through your alternate gateway
device to maintain Internet connectivity.
set backup option [ disabled | manual | automatic ]
Specifies whether backup to an IP gateway is disabled or enabled as manual or automatic. Default is disabled.
set backup failure-timeout [ 1 - 10 ]
Specifies the number of minutes you want the system to wait before the backup port
becomes enabled in the event of primary line failure, when backup option is set to automatic. Sets the Default is 1.
set backup ping-host [ 1 | 2 ] [ name | address ]
Specifies whether the Gateway will ping an IP address or resolvable DNS name, when
backup option is set to automatic. These are optional items that are particularly useful
for testing if the remote end of a VPN connection has gone down.
The Gateway will ping both addresses simultaneously at five-second intervals, recording
the ping responses from each host. The Gateway will proceed into backup mode only if neither of the configured remote hosts responds.
304
CONFIG Commands
set backup ping-host [ 1 | 2 ] [ name hostname | ip-address
ip_address ]
Specifies an IP address or resolvable DNS name for the Gateway to ping.
set backup auto-recovery [ off | on ]
Turns automatic recovery off or on. Default is off.
set backup recovery-timeout [ 1 - 10 ]
If auto-recovery is set to on, specifies the number of minutes for the system to wait
before attempting to switch back to the WAN connection. This allows you to be sure that
the WAN connection is well re-established before the gateway switches back to it from the
backup mode. Default is 1.
set ip backup-gateway option [ on | off ]
Turns the backup gateway option on or off. Default is off.
set ip backup-gateway interface ip-address
Specifies the backup gateway interface ip address to which you want to direct the backup
connection.
set ip backup-gateway default ip_address
Specifies the ip address of the default gateway.
305
VDSL Settings
☛
CAUTION!
These settings are for very advanced users and lab technicians. Exercise
extreme caution when modifying any of these settings.
set vdsl sys-option [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
sys-bandplan [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
psd-mask-level [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
pbo-k1_1 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k1_2 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k1_3 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k2_1 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k2_2 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
pbo-k2_3 [ 0x00000000 - 0xffffffff ]
line-type [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
us-max-inter-delay [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
ds-max-inter-delay [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
us-target-noise-margin [ 0x0000 - 0xffff ]
ds-target-noise-margin [ 0x0000 - 0xffff ]
min-noise-margin [ 0x0000 - 0xffff ]
port-bandplan [ 0x00 - xff ]
framing-mode [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
band-mod [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
port-option [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
power-mode [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
tx-filter [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
rx-filter [ 0x00 - 0xff ]
dying-gasp [ off | on ]
306
CONFIG Commands
VDSL Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Default
Meaning
sys-option
0x00
VDSL system option(bit0=ntr, 1=margin, 2=ini,
3=pbo, 4=tlan, 5=pbo)
sys-bandplan
0x02
VDSL system bandplan(bp_3_998_4=2,
bp4_997_3=3, bp5_997_3=4…)
psd-mask-level
0x00
VDSL system psd mask(def=0, 1=ansim1cab,
2=ansim2cab, 3=etsim1cab, 4=etsim2cab)
pbo-k1_1
0x00
VDSL system power back-off k1_1
pbo-k1_2
0x00
VDSL system power back-off k1_2
pbo-k1_3
0x00
VDSL system power back-off k1_3
pbo-k2_1
0x00
VDSL system power back-off k2_1
pbo-k2_2
0x00
VDSL system power back-off k2_2
pbo-k2_3
0x00
VDSL system power back-off k2_3
line-type
0x81
VDSL port line type(auto=0x80, vdsl=0x81,
vdsl_etsi=0x82)
us-max-inter-delay
0x04
VDSL port upstream max inter delay
ds-max-inter-delay
0x04
VDSL port downstream max inter delay
us-target-noise-margin
0x0C
VDSL port upstream target noise margin
ds-target-noise-margin
0x0C
VDSL port downstream target noise margin
min-noise-margin
0x0A
VDSL port minimum noise margin
port-bandplan
0x02
VDSL port bandplan
framing-mode
0x90
DSL port frame mode(0-ATM; 0x80-PTM;
0x90-Auto(EFM/PTM)
band-mod
0x11
VDSL port band mod
port-option
0x0A - Annex B
0x06 - Annex A
VDSL port portoption(bit0=I43, bit1=v43,
bit2=a43, bit3=b43)
power-mode
0x01
VDSL port power mode
tx-filter
0x02
VDSL port txPathFilterMode
rx-filter
0x02
VDSL port rxPathFilterMode
dying-gasp
off
Dying Gasp On/Off
307
VDSL Parameters Accepted Values
Parameter
sys-option
308
Accepted Values
Bit[0]: NTR_DISABLE
Bit[1]: ALW_MARGIN_ADJUST.
1: the SNR margin for the optional band is reduced by up to 2.5
dB, but never below a minimum of 4 dB.
Bit[2]: SUPPORT_INI
Bit[4]: TLAN Enable
Bit[5]: PBO Weak mode Enable (Applicable only when PBO
Bit[3]=0.
Bit[6]: ADSL_SAFE_MODE Enable
Bit[7]: TLAN_SAFE_MODE Enable (Applicable only when TLAN
Enable Bit[4] is set. If TLAN_SAFE_MODE not set, line will
attempt to retrain at higher rates, but less stable line)
CONFIG Commands
VDSL Parameters Accepted Values
Parameter
sys-bandplan
Accepted Values
BP1_998_3
(0x00)
BP2_998_3
(0x01)
BP998_3B_8_5M (0x01)
BP3_998_4
(0x02)
BP998_4B_12M (0x02)
BP4_997_3
(0x03)
BP997_3B_7_1M (0x03)
BP5_997_3
(0x04)
BP6_997_4
(0x05)
BP997_4B_7_1M (0x05)
BP7_MXU_3
(0x06)
FLEX_3B_8_5M (0x06)
BP8_MXU_2
(0x07)
BP9_998_2
(0x08)
BP10_998_2
(0x09)
BP998_2B_3_8M (0x09)
BP11_998_2
(0x0A)
BP12_998_2
(0x0B)
BP13_MXU_3
(0x0C)
BP14_MXU_3
(0x0D)
BP15_MXU_3
(0x0E)
BP16_997_4B_4P (0x0F)
BP17_998_138_4400 (0x10)
BP18_997_138_4400(0x11)
BP19_997_32_4400(0x12)
BP20_998_138_4400_opBand (0x15)
BP21_997_138_4400_opBand (0x16)
BP22_998_138_4400_opBand(0x16)
BP23_998_138_16000 (0x17)
BP24_998_3B_8KHZ (0x18)
BP25_998_138_17600 (0x19)
BP26_CH1_3 (0x1A)
BP27_CH1_4 (0x1B)
309
VDSL Parameters Accepted Values
Parameter
psd-mask-level
0x00 -- default mask (old gains from before)
0x01 -- ANSI M1 CAB
0x02 -- ANSI M2 CAB
0x03 -- ETSI M1 CAB
0x04 -- ETSI M2 CAB
0x05 -- ITU-T Annex F (Japan)
0x06 - ANSI M1 Ex
0x07 - ANSI M2 Ex
0x08 -- ETSI M1 Ex
0x09 - ETSI M2 Ex
0x0A - RESERVED
0x0B - PSD_K (Korean M1 FTTCab -59dBm/Hz)
pbo-k1_1
K1 and K2 parameters allow the user more flexibility in using
Upstream Power Back-Off (UPBO) on CPE modem. Changing
K1 and K2 values will affect the CPE TX PSD. Refer to VDSL
standards for exact relation between K1, K2 parameters and TX
PSD. There is an individual set of K1/K2 parameters associated
with each upstream band in the PSD: Upstream Band 0 or
Optional band, Upstream band 1, Upstream band 2 and
Upstream Band 3. Setting all K2 parameters to 0 and all K1 to a
high power level(ie low number) will essentially disable UPBO.
pbo-k1_2
pbo-k1_3
pbo-k2_1
pbo-k2_2
pbo-k2_3
310
Accepted Values
line-type
VDSL_AUTO_DETECT – (0x80)
VDSL – (0x81)
VDSL_ETSI – (0x82)
us-max-inter-delay
Maximum upstream interleave delay.
Provisioned in steps of 0.5 ms. User defined.
ds-max-inter-delay
Maximum downstream interleave delay.
Provisioned in steps of 0.5 ms. User defined.
us-target-noise-margin
Range 0-31.0dB, increments of 0.5dB (e.g., 0 =
0dB, 1 = 0.5dB, ...)
ds-target-noise-margin
Range 0-31.0dB, increments of 0.5dB (e.g., 0 =
0dB, 1 = 0.5dB, ...)
min-noise-margin
Range 0-31.0dB, increments of 0.5dB (e.g., 0 =
0dB, 1 = 0.5dB, ...)
CONFIG Commands
VDSL Parameters Accepted Values
Parameter
port-bandplan
Accepted Values
BP1_998_3
(0x00)
BP2_998_3
(0x01)
BP998_3B_8_5M (0x01)
BP3_998_4
(0x02)
BP998_4B_12M (0x02)
BP4_997_3
(0x03)
BP997_3B_7_1M (0x03)
BP5_997_3
(0x04)
BP6_997_4
(0x05)
BP997_4B_7_1M (0x05)
BP7_MXU_3
(0x06)
FLEX_3B_8_5M (0x06)
BP8_MXU_2
(0x07)
BP9_998_2
(0x08)
BP10_998_2
(0x09)
BP998_2B_3_8M (0x09)
BP11_998_2
(0x0A)
BP12_998_2
(0x0B)
BP13_MXU_3
(0x0C)
BP14_MXU_3
(0x0D)
BP15_MXU_3
(0x0E)
BP16_997_4B_4P (0x0F)
BP17_998_138_4400 (0x10)
BP18_997_138_4400(0x11)
BP19_997_32_4400(0x12)
BP20_998_138_4400_opBand (0x15)
BP21_997_138_4400_opBand (0x16)
BP22_998_138_4400_opBand(0x16)
BP23_998_138_16000 (0x17)
BP24_998_3B_8KHZ (0x18)
BP25_998_138_17600 (0x19)
BP26_CH1_3 (0x1A)
BP27_CH1_4 (0x1B)
311
VDSL Parameters Accepted Values
Parameter
312
Accepted Values
framing-mode
HDLC – 0x80
AUTO – 0x90
ATM – 0x00
band-mod
Bit 0, 1: Tx Cfg band
1- All tones on
2- All tones below 640 Khz are turned off
3- All tones below 1.1 Mhz are turned off
Bit 2,3: Not used
Bit 4,5: Rx Cfg band
1- All tones on
2- All tones below 640 Khz are turned off
3- All tones below 1.1 Mhz are turned off
Bit 6, 7:Optional band
0- No Optional band
1- ANNEX_A_6_32 ( ie. 25KHz to 138 KHz)
2- ANNEX_B_32_64 (ie. 138 KHz to 276 KHz)
3- ANNEX_B_6_64 (ie. 25KHz to 276 KHz)
port-option
Bit [0]: I 43 G.hs carrier set.
Bit [1]: V 43 G.hs carrier set.
Bit [2]. A 43 G.hs carrier set.
Bit [3]: B 43 G.hs carrier set.
Bit[4:7]: shall be set to 0.
power-mode
0: 8.5dBm power output
1: 11.5 dBm power output
tx-filter
0: using internal filter in Tx path
1: using K1 external filter in Tx path
(for Korea VLR Application)
2: using U1 external filter in Tx path
(for US / Korea VLR Application)
3: using H1 external filter in Tx path
(for 100/100 Application)
CONFIG Commands
VDSL Parameters Accepted Values
Parameter
Accepted Values
rx-filter
0: using internal filter in Rx path
1: using K1 external filter in Rx path
(for Korea VLR Application)
2: using U1 external filter in Rx path
(for US / Korea VLR Application)
3: using H1 external filter in Rx path
(for 100/100 Application)
dying-gasp
Dying Gasp is a message sent from CPE to CO using the indicator bit. It indicates that the CPE is experiencing an impending
loss of power.
Off: Dying Gasp off (don't send a message to CO).
On: Dying Gasp on.
313
314
CHAPTER 6
Glossary
10Base-T. IEEE 802.3 specification for Ethernet that uses
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring with RJ-45 eight-conductor
plugs at each end. Runs at 10 Mbps.
100Base-T. IEEE 802.3 specification for Ethernet that uses
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring with RJ-45 eight-conductor
plugs at each end. Runs at 100 Mbps.
-----A----ACK. Acknowledgment. Message sent from one network device
to another to indicate that some event has occurred. See NAK.
access rate. Transmission speed, in bits per second, of the circuit between the end user and the network.
315
adapter. Board installed in a computer system to provide network communication capability to and from that computer system.
address mask. See subnet mask.
ADSL. Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line. Modems attached
to twisted pair copper wiring that transmit 1.5-9 Mbps downstream (to the subscriber) and 16 -640 kbps upstream,
depending on line distance. (Downstream rates are usually
lower that 1.5Mbps in practice.)
AH. The Authentication Header provides data origin authentication, connectionless integrity, and anti-replay protection services. It protects all data in a datagram from tampering,
including the fields in the header that do not change in transit.
Does not provide confidentiality.
ANSI. American National Standards Institute.
ASCII. American Standard Code for Information Interchange
(pronounced ASK-ee). Code in which numbers from 0 to 255
represent individual characters, such as letters, numbers, and
punctuation marks; used in text representation and communication protocols.
asynchronous communication. Network system that allows
data to be sent at irregular intervals by preceding each octet
with a start bit and following it with a stop bit. Compare synchronous communication.
Auth Protocol. Authentication Protocol for IP packet header.
The three parameter values are None, Encapsulating Security
Payload (ESP) and Authentication Header (AH).
316
-----B----backbone. The segment of the network used as the primary
path for transporting traffic between network segments.
baud rate. Unit of signaling speed equal to the number of number of times per second a signal in a communications channel
varies between states. Baud is synonymous with bits per second (bps) if each signal represents one bit.
binary. Numbering system that uses only zeros and ones.
bps. Bits per second. A measure of data transmission speed.
BRI. Basic Rate Interface. ISDN standard for provision of lowspeed ISDN services (two B channels (64 kbps each) and one
D channel (16 kbps)) over a single wire pair.
bridge. Device that passes packets between two network segments according to the packets' destination address.
broadcast. Message sent to all nodes on a network.
broadcast address. Special IP address reserved for simultaneous broadcast to all network nodes.
buffer. Storage area used to hold data until it can be forwarded.
-----C----carrier. Signal suitable for transmission of information.
CCITT. Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique et Téléphonique or Consultative Committee for International Telegraph
317
and Telephone. An international organization responsible for
developing telecommunication standards.
CD. Carrier Detect.
CHAP. Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol. Security
protocol in PPP that prevents unauthorized access to network
services. See RFC 1334 for PAP specifications Compare PAP.
client. Network node that requests services from a server.
CPE. Customer Premises Equipment. Terminating equipment
such as terminals, telephones and modems that connects a
customer site to the telephone company network.
CO. Central Office. Typically a local telephone company facility
responsible for connecting all lines in an area.
compression. Operation performed on a data set that reduces
its size to improve storage or transmission rate.
crossover cable. Cable that lets you connect a port on one
Ethernet hub to a port on another Ethernet hub. You can order
an Ethernet crossover cable from Motorola Netopia®, if
needed.
CSU/DSU. Channel Service Unit/Data Service Unit. Device
responsible for connecting a digital circuit, such as a T1 link,
with a terminal or data communications device.
-----D----data bits. Number of bits used to make up a character.
318
datagram. Logical grouping of information sent as a networklayer unit. Compare frame, packet.
DCE. Digital Communication Equipment. Device that connects
the communication circuit to the network end node (DTE). A
modem and a CSU/DSU are examples of a DCE.
dedicated line. Communication circuit that is used exclusively
to connect two network devices. Compare dial on demand.
DES. Data Encryption Standard is a 56-bit encryption algorithm developed by the U.S. National Bureau of Standards (now
the National Institute of Standards and Technology).
3DES. Triple DES, with a 168 bit encryption key, is the most
accepted variant of DES.
DH Group. Diffie-Hellman is a public key algorithm used
between two systems to determine and deliver secret keys
used for encryption. Groups 1, 2 and 5 are supported. Also,
see Diffie-Hellman listing.
DHCP. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A network configuration protocol that lets a router or other device assign IP
addresses and supply other network configuration information
to computers on your network.
dial on demand. Communication circuit opened over standard
telephone lines when a network connection is needed.
Diffie-Hellman. A group of key-agreement algorithms that let
two computers compute a key independently without exchanging the actual key. It can generate an unbiased secret key over
an insecure medium.
319
domain name. Name identifying an organization on the Internet. Domain names consists of sets of characters separated by
periods (dots). The last set of characters identifies the type of
organization (.GOV, .COM, .EDU) or geographical location (.US,
.SE).
domain name server. Network computer that matches host
names to IP addresses in response to Domain Name System
(DNS) requests.
Domain Name System (DNS). Standard method of identifying
computers by name rather than by numeric IP address.
DSL. Digital Subscriber Line. Modems on either end of a single
twisted pair wire that delivers ISDN Basic Rate Access.
DTE. Data Terminal Equipment. Network node that passes
information to a DCE (modem) for transmission. A computer or
router communicating through a modem is an example of a DTE
device.
DTR. Data Terminal Ready. Circuit activated to indicate to a
modem (or other DCE) that the computer (or other DTE) is ready
to send and receive data.
-----E----echo interval. Frequency with which the router sends out echo
requests.
Enable. This toggle button is used to enable/disable the configured tunnel.
320
encapsulation. Technique used to enclose information formatted for one protocol, such as AppleTalk, within a packet formatted for a different protocol, such as TCP/IP.
Encrypt Protocol. Encryption protocol for the tunnel session.
Parameter values supported include NONE or ESP.
encryption. The application of a specific algorithm to a data
set so that anyone without the encryption key cannot understand the information.
ESP. Encapsulation Security Payload (ESP) header provides
confidentiality, data origin authentication, connectionless integrity, anti-replay protection, and limited traffic flow confidentiality.
It encrypts the contents of the datagram as specified by the
Security Association. The ESP transformations encrypt and
decrypt portions of datagrams, wrapping or unwrapping the datagram within another IP datagram. Optionally, ESP transformations may perform data integrity validation and compute an
Integrity Check Value for the datagram being sent. The complete IP datagram is enclosed within the ESP payload.
Ethernet crossover cable. See crossover cable.
-----F----FCS. Frame Check Sequence. Data included in frames for error
control.
flow control. Technique using hardware circuits or control characters to regulate the transmission of data between a computer
(or other DTE) and a modem (or other DCE). Typically, the
modem has buffers to hold data; if the buffers approach capac-
321
ity, the modem signals the computer to stop while it catches up
on processing the data in the buffer. See CTS, RTS, xon/xoff.
fragmentation. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units
so that they can be sent over a network medium that cannot
transmit the complete packet as a unit.
frame. Logical grouping of information sent as a link-layer unit.
Compare datagram, packet.
FTP. File Transfer Protocol. Application protocol that lets one IP
node transfer files to and from another node.
FTP server. Host on network from which clients can transfer
files.
-----H----Hard MBytes. Setting the Hard MBytes parameter forces the
renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the
configured Hard MByte value.
The value can be configured between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and
refers to data traffic passed.
Hard Seconds. Setting the Hard Seconds parameter forces
the renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at
the configured Hard Seconds value. The value can be configured between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds.
A tunnel will start the process of renegotiation at the soft
threshold and renegotiation must happen by the hard limit or
traffic over the tunnel is terminated.
322
hardware handshake. Method of flow control using two control lines, usually Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send
(CTS).
header. The portion of a packet, preceding the actual data,
containing source and destination addresses and error-checking fields.
HMAC. Hash-based Message Authentication Code
hop. A unit for measuring the number of routers a packet has
passed through when traveling from one network to another.
hop count. Distance, measured in the number of routers to be
traversed, from a local router to a remote network. See metric.
hub. Another name for a repeater. The hub is a critical network
element that connects everything to one centralized point. A
hub is simply a box with multiple ports for network connections.
Each device on the network is attached to the hub via an Ethernet cable.
-----I----IKE. Internet Key Exchange protocol provides automated key
management and is a preferred alternative to manual key management as it provides better security. Manual key management is practical in a small, static environment of two or three
sites. Exchanging the key is done through manual means.
Because IKE provides automated key exchange, it is good for
larger, more dynamic environments.
INSPECTION. The best option for Internet communications
security is to have an SMLI firewall constantly inspecting the
flow of traffic: determining direction, limiting or eliminating
323
inbound access, and verifying down to the packet level that the
network traffic is only what the customer chooses. The Motorola Netopia® Gateway works like a network super traffic cop,
inspecting and filtering out undesired traffic based on your
security policy and resulting configuration.
interface. A connection between two devices or networks.
internet address. IP address. A 32-bit address used to route
packets on a TCP/IP network. In dotted decimal notation, each
eight bits of the 32-bit number are presented as a decimal number, with the four octets separated by periods.
IPCP. Internet Protocol Control Protocol. A network control protocol in PPP specifying how IP communications will be configured and operated over a PPP link.
IPSEC. A protocol suite defined by the Internet Engineering
Task Force to protect IP traffic at packet level. It can be used for
protecting the data transmitted by any service or application
that is based on IP, but is commonly used for VPNs.
ISAKMP. Internet Security Association and Key Management
Protocol is a framework for creating connection specific parameters. It is a protocol for establishing, negotiating, modifying,
and deleting SAs and provides a framework for authentication
and key exchange. ISAKMP is a part of the IKE protocol.
-----K----Key Management . The Key Management algorithm manages
the exchange of security keys in the IPSec protocol architecture. SafeHarbour supports the standard Internet Key
Exchange (IKE)
324
-----L----LCP. Link Control Protocol. Protocol responsible for negotiating
connection configuration parameters, authenticating peers on
the link, determining whether a link is functioning properly, and
terminating the link. Documented in RFC 1331.
LQM Link Quality Monitoring. Optional facility that lets PPP
make policy decisions based on the observed quality of the link
between peers. Documented in RFC 1333.
loopback test. Diagnostic procedure in which data is sent from
a devices's output channel and directed back to its input channel so that what was sent can be compared to what was
received.
-----M----magic number. Random number generated by a router and
included in packets it sends to other routers. If the router
receives a packet with the same magic number it is using, the
router sends and receives packets with new random numbers
to determine if it is talking to itself.
MD5. A 128-bit, message-digest, authentication algorithm used
to create digital signatures. It computes a secure, irreversible,
cryptographically strong hash value for a document. Less
secure than variant SHA-1.
metric. Distance, measured in the number of routers a packet
must traverse, that a packet must travel to go from a router to a
remote network. A route with a low metric is considered more
efficient, and therefore preferable, to a route with a high metric.
See hop count.
325
modem. Modulator/demodulator. Device used to convert a digital signal to an analog signal for transmission over standard
telephone lines. A modem at the other end of the connection
converts the analog signal back to a digital signal.
MRU. Maximum Receive Unit. The maximum packet size, in
bytes, that a network interface will accept.
MTU. Maximum Transmission Unit. The maximum packet size,
in bytes, that can be sent over a network interface.
MULTI-LAYER. The Open System Interconnection (OSI) model
divides network traffic into seven distinct levels, from the Physical (hardware) layer to the Application (software) layer. Those in
between are the Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
and Data Link layers. Simple first and second generation firewall technologies inspect between 1 and 3 layers of the 7 layer
model, while our SMLI engine inspects layers 2 through 7.
-----N----NAK. Negative acknowledgment. See ACK.
Name. The Name parameter refers to the name of the configured tunnel. This is mainly used as an identifier for the administrator. The Name parameter is an ASCII and is limited to 31
characters. The tunnel name is the only IPSec parameter that
does not need to match the peer gateway.
NCP. Network Control Protocol.
Negotiation Method. This parameter refers to the method
used during the Phase I key exchange, or IKE process. SafeHarbour supports Main or Aggressive Mode. Main mode requires 3
326
two-way message exchanges while Aggressive mode only
requires 3 total message exchanges.
null modem. Cable or connection device used to connect two
computing devices directly rather than over a network.
-----P----packet. Logical grouping of information that includes a header
and data. Compare frame, datagram.
PAP. Password Authentication Protocol. Security protocol within
the PPP protocol suite that prevents unauthorized access to
network services. See RFC 1334 for PAP specifications. Compare CHAP.
parity. Method of checking the integrity of each character
received over a communication channel.
Peer External IP Address. The Peer External IP Address is the
public, or routable IP address of the remote gateway or VPN
server you are establishing the tunnel with.
Peer Internal IP Network. The Peer Internal IP Network is the
private, or Local Area Network (LAN) address of the remote
gateway or VPN Server you are communicating with.
Peer Internal IP Netmask. The Peer Internal IP Netmask is the
subnet mask of the Peer Internal IP Network.
PFS Enable. Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy. PFS forces a DH
negotiation during Phase II of IKE-IPSec SA exchange. You can
disable this or select a DH group 1, 2, or 5. PFS is a security
principle that ensures that any single key being compromised
will permit access to only data protected by that single key. In
327
PFS, the key used to protect transmission of data must not be
used to derive any additional keys. If the key was derived from
some other keying material, that material must not be used to
derive any more keys.
PING. Packet INternet Groper. Utility program that uses an
ICMP echo message and its reply to verify that one network
node can reach another. Often used to verify that two hosts can
communicate over a network.
PPP. Point-to-Point Protocol. Provides a method for transmitting
datagrams over serial router-to-router or host-to-network connections using synchronous or asynchronous circuits.
Pre-Shared Key. The Pre-Shared Key is a parameter used for
authenticating each side. The value can be an ASCII or Hex and
a maximum of 64 characters.
Pre-Shared Key Type. The Pre-Shared Key Type classifies the
Pre-Shared Key. SafeHarbour supports ASCII or HEX types
protocol. Formal set of rules and conventions that specify how
information can be exchanged over a network.
PSTN. Public Switched Telephone Network.
-----R----repeater. Device that regenerates and propagates electrical
signals between two network segments. Also known as a hub.
RFC. Request for Comment. Set of documents that specify the
conventions and standards for TCP/IP networking.
328
RIP. Routing Information Protocol. Protocol responsible for distributing information about available routes and networks from
one router to another.
RJ-11. Four-pin connector used for telephones.
RJ-45. Eight-pin connector used for 10BaseT (twisted pair
Ethernet) networks.
route. Path through a network from one node to another. A
large internetwork can have several alternate routes from a
source to a destination.
routing table. Table stored in a router or other networking
device that records available routes and distances for remote
network destinations.
-----S----SA Encrypt Type. SA Encryption Type refers to the symmetric
encryption type. This encryption algorithm will be used to
encrypt each data packet. SA Encryption Type values supported
include DES and 3DES.
SA Hash Type. SA Hash Type refers to the Authentication
Hash algorithm used during SA negotiation. Values supported
include MD5 SHA1. N/A will display if NONE is chose for Auth
Protocol.
Security Association. From the IPSEC point of view, an SA is
a data structure that describes which transformation is to be
applied to a datagram and how. The SA specifies:
• The authentication algorithm for AH and ESP
• The encryption algorithm for ESP
329
• The encryption and authentication keys
• Lifetime of encryption keys
• The lifetime of the SA
• Replay prevention sequence number and the replay bit table
An arbitrary 32-bit number called a Security Parameters Index
(SPI), as well as the destination host’s address and the IPSEC
protocol identifier, identify each SA. An SPI is assigned to an SA
when the SA is negotiated. The SA can be referred to by using
an SPI in AH and ESP transformations. SA is unidirectional. SAs
are commonly setup as bundles, because typically two SAs are
required for communications. SA management is always done
on bundles (setup, delete, relay).
serial communication. Method of data transmission in which
data bits are transmitted sequentially over a communication
channel
SHA-1. An implementation of the U.S. Government Secure
Hash Algorithm; a 160-bit authentication algorithm.
Soft MBytes. Setting the Soft MBytes parameter forces the
renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the
configured Soft MByte value. The value can be configured
between 1 and 1,000,000 MB and refers to data traffic passed.
If this value is not achieved, the Hard MBytes parameter is
enforced.
Soft Seconds. Setting the Soft Seconds parameter forces the
renegotiation of the IPSec Security Associations (SAs) at the
configured Soft Seconds value. The value can be configured
between 60 and 1,000,000 seconds.
330
SPI . The Security Parameter Index is an identifier for the
encryption and authentication algorithm and key. The SPI indicates to the remote firewall the algorithm and key being used to
encrypt and authenticate a packet. It should be a unique number greater than 255.
STATEFUL. The Motorola Netopia® Gateway monitors and
maintains the state of any network transaction. In terms of network request-and-reply, state consists of the source IP address,
destination IP address, communication ports, and data
sequence. The Motorola Netopia® Gateway processes the
stream of a network conversation, rather than just individual
packets. It verifies that packets are sent from and received by
the proper IP addresses along the proper communication ports
in the correct order and that no imposter packets interrupt the
packet flow. Packet filtering monitors only the ports involved,
while the Motorola Netopia® Gateway analyzes the continuous
conversation stream, preventing session hijacking and denial of
service attacks.
static route. Route entered manually in a routing table.
subnet mask. A 32-bit address mask that identifies which bits
of an IP address represent network address information and
which bits represent node identifier information.
synchronous communication. Method of data communication requiring the transmission of timing signals to keep peers
synchronized in sending and receiving blocks of data.
-----T----telnet. IP protocol that lets a user on one host establish and
use a virtual terminal connection to a remote host.
331
twisted pair. Cable consisting of two copper strands twisted
around each other. The twisting provides protection against
electromagnetic interference.
-----U----UTP. Unshielded twisted pair cable.
-----V----VJ. Van Jacobson. Abbreviation for a compression standard
documented in RFC 1144.
-----W----WAN. Wide Area Network. Private network facilities, usually
offered by public telephone companies but increasingly available from alternative access providers (sometimes called Competitive Access Providers, or CAPs), that link business network
nodes.
WWW. World Wide Web.
332
Description
CHAPTER 7
Technical Specifications and
Safety Information
Description
Dimensions:
Smart Modems: 13.5 cm (w) x 13.5 cm (d) x 3.5 cm (h); 5.25” (w) x 5.25” (d) x
1.375” (h)
Wireless Models: 19.5 cm (w) x 17.0 cm (d) x 4.0 cm (h); 7.6” (w) x 6.75” (d) x 1.5” (h)
3342/3352 Pocket Modems: 8.5 cm (w) x 4.5 cm (d) x 2 cm (h); 3.375” (w) x 1.75” (d) x .875” (h)
2200-Series Modems: 1.06"(2.69 cm) H, 4.36" (11.07 cm) W, 5.71"(14.50 cm) L
2200-Series Wireless Models: 1.2"(3.0cm) H, 8.7" (22.0 cm) W, 5.2"(13.2cm) L
Communications interfaces: The Motorola Netopia® 2200 and 3300 Series Gateways have an
RJ-11 jack for DSL line connections or an RJ-45 jack for cable/DSL modem connections and 1 or 4–
port 10/100Base-T Ethernet switch for your LAN connections. Some models have a USB port that
can be used to connect to your PC; in some cases, the USB port also serves as the power source.
Some models contain an 802.11 wireless LAN transmitter.
Power requirements
• 12 VDC input
• USB-powered models only: For Use with Listed I.T.E. Only
Environment
Operating temperature: 0° to +40° C
Storage temperature: 0° to +70° C
333
Relative storage humidity: 20 to 80% noncondensing
Software and protocols
Software media: Software preloaded on internal flash memory; field upgrades done via download
to internal flash memory via TFTP or web upload. (does not apply to 3342/3352)
Routing: TCP/IP Internet Protocol Suite, RIP
WAN support: PPPoE, DHCP, static IP address
Security: PAP, CHAP, UI password security, IPsec, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificates
Management/configuration methods: HTTP (Web server), Telnet, SNMP, TR-069
Diagnostics: Ping, event logging, routing table displays, statistics counters, web-based
management
334
Agency approvals
Agency approvals
North America
Safety Approvals:
■
United States – UL 60950, Third Edition
■
Canada – CSA: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-00
EMC:
■
United States – FCC Part 15 Class B
■
Canada – ICES-003
Telecom:
■
United States – 47 CFR Part 68
■
Canada – CS-03
International
Safety Approvals:
■
Low Voltage (European directive) 73/23
■
EN60950 (Europe)
EMI Compatibility:
■
89/336/EEC (European directive)
■
EN55022:1994
■
EN300 386 V1.2.1 (non-wireless products)
■
EN 301-489 (wireless products)
CISPR22 Class B
Regulatory notices
European Community. This Motorola Netopia® product conforms to the European Community
CE Mark standard for the design and manufacturing of information technology equipment. This
standard covers a broad area of product design, including RF emissions and immunity from electrical
disturbances.
335
The Motorola Netopia® 2200 and 3300 Series complies with the following EU directives:
■
Low Voltage, 73/23/EEC
■
EMC Compatibility, 89/336/EEC, conforming to EN 55 022
Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformance
☛
Warnings:
This is a Class B product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Adequate measures include increasing the physical distance between this product and
other electrical devices.
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
United States. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
■
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
■
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help.
Service requirements. In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by
our Company or an authorized agent. Under FCC rules, no customer is authorized to repair this
equipment. This restriction applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or our of warranty. It is
the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our Company or to one
of our authorized agents. Service can be obtained at Motorola, Inc., 6001 Shellmound Street,
Emeryville, California, 94608. Telephone: 510-597-5400.
336
Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformance
☛
Important
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of
shielded cables and connectors between system components. Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by the manufacturer could void your authority to
operate the equipment.
Canada. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
Declaration for Canadian users
NOTICE: The Canadian Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This
certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network
protective, operation, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the
company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended
by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer
should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation
of service in some situations.
Repairs to the certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the
user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum
of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
337
Important Safety Instructions
Australian Safety Information
The following safety information is provided in conformance with Australian safety requirements:
Caution
DO NOT USE BEFORE READING THE INSTRUCTIONS: Do not connect the Ethernet ports to a carrier or
carriage service provider’s telecommunications network or facility unless: a) you have the written
consent of the network or facility manager, or b) the connection is in accordance with a connection
permit or connection rules.
Connection of the Ethernet ports may cause a hazard or damage to the telecommunication network
or facility, or persons, with consequential liability for substantial compensation.
Caution
■
The direct plug-in power supply serves as the main power disconnect; locate the direct plug-in
power supply near the product for easy access.
■
For use only with CSA Certified Class 2 power supply, rated 12VDC.
Telecommunication installation cautions
338
■
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
■
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
■
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
■
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
■
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
■
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
47 CFR Part 68 Information
47 CFR Part 68 Information
FCC Requirements
1.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established Rules which permit this device
to be directly connected to the telephone network. Standardized jacks are used for these
connections. This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin phones.
2.
If this device is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network; this
device should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until
repair has been made. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect
service.
3.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures; if such
changes affect the compatibility or use of this device, the telephone company is required to give
adequate notice of the changes. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
4.
If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines,
inform them of:
a. The telephone number to which this unit is connected.
b. The ringer equivalence number. [0.XB]
c. The USOC jack required. [RJ11C]
d. The FCC Registration Number. [XXXUSA-XXXXX-XX-E]
Items (b) and (d) are indicated on the label. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to
determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line. In most areas, the sum
of the REN's of all devices on any one line should not exceed five (5.0). If too many devices are
attached, they may not ring properly.
FCC Statements
a) This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.
On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product
identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the
telephone company.
b) List all applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes (“USOC”) for the equipment:
RJ11.
c) A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
details.
339
d) The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the
local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2002, the REN for this product is part
of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the
REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately
shown on the label.
e) If this equipment, the Motorola Netopia® 2200 or 3300 Series router, causes harm to the
telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance
of service may be required. But if advance notice isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify
the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC if you believe it is necessary.
f) The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide
advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
g) If trouble is experienced with this equipment, the Motorola Netopia® 2200 or 3300 Series router,
for repair or warranty information, please contact:
Motorola Technical Support
510-597-5400
www.netopia.com.
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that
you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
h) This equipment not intended to be repaired by the end user. In case of any problems, please refer
to the troubleshooting section of the Product User Manual before calling Motorola Technical Support.
i) Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
j) If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this Motorola Netopia® 2200 or 3300 Series router does not disable your alarm
equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone
company or qualified installer.
RF Exposure Statement:
NOTE: Installation of the wireless models must maintain at least 20 cm between the wireless
router and any body part of the user to be in compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines.
Electrical Safety Advisory
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive
to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major
nationwide problem. Therefore it is advised that this equipment be connected to AC power through
the use of a surge arrestor or similar protection device.
340
Copyright Acknowledgments
Copyright Acknowledgments
Because Motorola has included certain software source code in this product, Motorola includes the
following text required by the respective copyright holders:
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (c) 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission,
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear
in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
/Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape’s SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4,
341
RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author
of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup
or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.]
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
342
Copyright Acknowledgments
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (C) 1990, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
<<RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm>>
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the “RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified
as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
<<RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm>>
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the “RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD4 Message Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified
as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this
software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided “as is” without
express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright (c) 1989 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University. The name of the University may not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the following:
Copyright 2000, 2001 Shane Kerr. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
343
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
344
Index
Symbols
!! command 170
Numerics
3-D
Reach
Wireless
Configuration 39, 125
A
Access the GUI 73
Address resolution table 179
Administrative
restrictions 222
Administrator password 73,
168
Advanced Setup 65
Arguments, CLI 188
ARP
Command 171, 185
ATA configuration 191
ATM 67, 145
Authentication 245
Authentication trap 265
auto-channel mode 277
AutoChannel
Setting 42,
128, 277
C
CLI 163
!! command 170
Arguments 188
Command shortcuts 170
Command truncation 188
Configuration mode 187
Keywords 188
Navigating 187
Prompt 170, 187
Restart command 170
SHELL mode 170
View command 189
Closed System Mode 42,
128
Command
ARP 171, 185
Ping 174
Telnet 184
Command line interface (see
CLI)
Community 265
Compression, protocol 243
Concurrent
Bridging/
Routing 196
CONFIG
Command List 167
Configuration mode 187
Connection 79
Custom Service 61, 91
B
Backup 304
Bridging 196
Broadcast address 216, 218
D
Default Channel 42, 128
Default IP address 73
345
denial of service 331
DHCP 198
DHCP filtering 204
DHCP lease table 175
DHCP option filtering 204
DHCP Server 82
Diagnostic log 176, 181
Level 269
Diagnostics 16
DNS 208
DNS Proxy 14
Documentation
conventions 9
Domain
Name
System
(DNS) 208
DSL 66, 144
DSL Forum settings 302
Dynamic Addressing 27
E
Echo request 243
echo-period 243
Embedded Web Server 16
Ethernet 67, 145
Ethernet address 196
Ethernet statistics 175
F
Factory Reset Switch 161
firewall 180
FTP 240
G
Gaming 58
346
H
Hardware address 196
hijacking 331
Home Page (Basic Mode) 35
Hop count 238
HTTP traffic 252
I
ICMP Echo 174
IGMP 211
IGMP Snooping 212
IP 67, 145
IP address 215, 218
Default 73
IP interfaces 180
IP Passthrough 85
IP routes 180
IP Subnets 83
IPMap table 180
IPSec Tunnel 180
K
Keywords, CLI 188
L
LAN 68, 146
LAN
Host
Discovery
Table 180
LCP echo request 243
LEDs 34, 158
Limit Wireless Access by MAC
Address 55, 141
Links Bar 36, 77
Local Area Network 14
Location, SNMP 265
Log 181
Logging in 168
Logs 69, 147
lost echoes 243
M
Magic number 242
Memory 181
Metric 238
multi-cast
forwarding 217,
248
multiple subnets 83
Multiple Wireless IDs 50,
136
Multiple Wireless SSIDs
Wireless 278
N
Nameserver 208
NAT 18, 58, 222, 240
NAT Default Server 20
Netmask 219
Network
Address
Translation 18
Network Test Tools 16
NSLookup 16
O
set upnp option 301
Operating Mode
Wireless 41, 127, 278
P
PAP 12
Password
Administrator 73, 168
User 73, 168
persistent-log 271
Ping 16
Ping command 174
Pinholes 240
Port authentication 245
Port Forwarding 61, 91
Port forwarding 20
Port renumbering 252
PPP 187
PPPoE 12
Primary nameserver 208
Prompt, CLI 170, 187
Protocol compression 243
Q
qos
qos
qos
qos
max-burst-size 195
peak-cell-rate 194
service-class 194
sustained-cell-rate 195
R
Restart 177
Restart command 170
Restart timer 244
Restrictions 222
RIP 217, 219
Router Password 104
Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) 217, 219
347
rtsp-passthrough 237
S
Safety Instructions 26
Secondary nameserver 208
Session
Initiation
Protocol 294
Set bncp command 194,
195, 196
Set bridge commands 196
Set DMT commands 207
Set dns commands 208
Set
ip
static-routes
commands 237
Set ppp module port authentication command 245
Set
preference
more
command 251
Set
preference
verbose
command 251
set security state-insp 262
Set servers command 252
Set
servers
telnet-tcp
command 252
Set snmp sysgroup location
command 265
Set snmp traps authentification-traps
ip-address
command 265
Set system diagnostic-level
command 269
Set
system
heartbeat
command 272
Set
system
name
command 269
348
Set
system
NTP
command 273
Set
system
password
command 272
set system syslog 274
Set
wireless
option
command 277
Set wireless user-auth option
command 285
SHELL
Command Shortcuts 170
Commands 170
Prompt 170
SHELL level 187
SHELL mode 170
show config 177
Show ppp 187
Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) 265
SIP 294
sip-passthrough 237
SMTP 240
SNMP 240, 265
SNMP
Notify
Type
settings 266
SNMP V3 settings 266
stateful inspection 180
Static NAT 63, 93
Static route 237
status indicator lights 158
Step mode 189
Subnet mask 219
Subnets 83
subnets
multiple 83
Supported
Games
and
Software 59, 89
System contact, SNMP 265
System diagnostics 269
system idle-timeout 271
VPI/VCI 80
VPN
IPSec Pass Through 21
IPSec
Tunnel
Termination 22
T
W
Telnet 168, 240
Telnet command 184
Telnet traffic 252
TFTP 240
TFTP server 173
Toolbar 36, 77
TraceRoute 16
Trap 265
Trigger Ports 61, 91
Trivial
File
Transfer
Protocol 172
Truncation 188
Weighted Fair Queue 233
weighted fair queuing 231
Wide Area Network 12
Wi-Fi Protected Access 47,
133
Wired Equivalent Privacy 48,
134
Wireless
Configuration 39,
125
Wireless ID (SSID) 39, 125
Z
Zero Touch 273
U
UPnP 81
User List 70, 148
User name 168
User password 73, 168
V
set atm 194, 195
View command 189
view config 185
VLAN ID 112
VLAN Settings 288
Voice-over-IP 294
VoIP 294
349
350
Motorola Netopia® 2200-, 3300- or 7000-series
Motorola, Inc.
6001 Shellmound Street
Emeryville, CA 94608
October, 2007